一 : PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Miss White: Goodbye!
3. Let‘s do
Show me your pencil. Show me your ruler.
Show me your eraser. Show me your crayon.
Show me your pen.
4. Songs Hello
5. Hand work: ID card
课后练习题：
1. 从下列单词中选择恰当的答案
hello, school, pencil-case, xiao qiang, Bye
(!)Go to ________
(2)_____ , I‘m Sarah.
(3)My name is _______
(4)Goodbye, Xiao Hong.
___________
(5)Close your_____, please.
2.将正确的翻译填入题前括号内
（ ）1. 背上你的书包
A your bag B Open your bag C Close your bag D Carry your bag （ ）2. 请把尺子帮我看看
A Show me your pen B Show me your ruler C I have a ruler （ ）3. 去上学
A Go to school B Go home C Go to the door
3.从选项中选择恰当的一项
（1）Xiao Gang: What‘s your name?
Xiao Wnag: _________
A What‘s your name? B See you. C My name is XiaoHong.
(2) Li: Hello, Xiao jie.
Xiao Jie: _________
A Hi! B Hello,Xiao Li C Great!
(3) Tom: Goodbye, Tim.
Tim: ________
A Bye, Tom B Hello, Tom C Good!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(4) Jie: Happy Teacher‘s Day!
Miss White: ________
A Goodbye. B See you C Thank you
(5) Sarah: I have a ruler.
Mike: _________
A My name is Mike. B Bye, Sarah C Me,too
4. 连词成句
（1） your me ruler show
__________________________
(2) a book have I
_______________________
(3) your is name what
______________________
(4) Day Happy Teacher‘s
_________________________
Section B
1.Words and phrases
bag、book、school、sharpener、pencill-case
2.Dialogues
(1) A: Hello! I am Mike. What is your name?
B: My name is Chen jie.
A: Bye!
B: See you!
3.Let‘s do
Open your pencil-case. Show me your sharpener. Close your book. Carry your bag. Go to school.
4.Chant and song
(!) chant
I have a pencil, me too.
I have a book. Me too.
I have a ruler, me too.
I have a bag, me too.
I‘m going to school, me too.
(2) Song Happy Teacher‘s Day
5 Story time
Zip: Hello!
Zoom:Hi! Who is there?
Zip: Gusee!
Zoom:Are you Tutu?
Zip: No!
Zip: Ha!Ha! I‘m Zip.
Zoom: hi,Zip!My name is Zoom. Let‘s play! Ok? Zip: Great!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
6. Handwork: Card
课后练习题
一、请将下面汉语的序号填入相应英语句子前面
1怀特小姐 （ ） A Hello, I;m Mike.
2. 你好！我是迈克。(www.61k.com) （ ） B What‘s your name?
3.把你的钢笔给我看一看。 （ ） C Goodbye, Chen Jie!
4.你叫什么名字？ （ ） D Miss White
5.再见，陈洁！ （ ） E Show me your pen.
二、从第二栏中找到第一栏的答语
（ ） 1. Hello! I‘m Sarah. A Bye, Miss White
( ) 2. Goodbye! B Hi! I‘m Wu Yifan.
( ) 3. What‘s your name? C My name is Bai Ling.
三、 把字母重新排列使它成为一个新的单词
1. eanm________ 2. lenicp_______ 3. pharreesh_________
Unit Two Look at Me
Section A
1. Words and phrases
eye、ear、nose、face、mouth
2. Dialogues
A: Good morning!
B: Good morning!
A : Hi!
B: Hello!
A: This is John.
B: Nice to meet you!
A:Let‘s go to school!
B:Ok!
3. Let‘s do
Touch your head.
Touch your nose.
Touch your eye.
Touch your mouth.
Touch your ear.
Touch your face.
4. Song Teddy bear
5. Handwork: 鸡蛋上画五官
一、从左边的单词从给右边的单词找朋友
1. Happy A Foot
2.Stamp your B School
3.Let‘s go to C Nose
4.Good D Afternoon
5.Nice to E Halloween
4. gba_________
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
6.Touch your F meet you
二、找出不同类的词，将字母填入括号内
（ ）1. A eye B face C pen
( ) 2. A eraser B pencil C body
( ) 3. A book B arm C leg
( ) 4. A Finger B morning C leg
( ) 5.A Good B bag C sharpener
( ) 6.A bye B mouth C ear
三、选择正确的译文，将字母代号填入题前括号内
（ ）1. This is my arm.
A 这是我的腿 B 这是我的耳朵 C 这是我的胳膊
（ ）2. 见到你很高兴
A What‘ s your name? B Nice to meet you C Nice to meet you, too.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
( ) 3. Good afternoon, Mike.
A 上午好，迈克。（www.61k.com） B 中午好，迈克 C 下午好，迈克
（ ）4. 好主意！
A Good idea! B Good morning. C Good afternoon
( ) 5. 碰你的鼻子。
A touch your face. B Touch your ear. C Touch your nose.
( ) 6. 你的嘴巴在哪儿？
A Where is your hand? B where is your mouth? C where is your nose?
四、重新调整字母顺序，组合成单词
1. nigerf _______ 2. nomirg________ 3. snoe_______ 4. hadn_________
5.foto________ 6. elg_________
Section B
1.Words and phrases
finger、body、leg、arm、foot、hand
2 Dialogues
Son: Hi, Mom!
Mom: Hi!
Son: Mom, this is Mike.
Mike: Good afternoon.
Mom: Good afternoon, Mike.
Mike: Nice to meet you.
Mom: Nice to meet you, too.
3.Let‘s do
Clap your hands. Snap your fingers. Wave your arms.
Cross your legs. Shake your body. Stamp your foot.
4.Chant
Where is your mouth? Here it is!
Where is your hand? Here it is!
Where is you ear? Here it is!
Where is your nose? Here it is!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5.Song Head ,Shoulders ,Knees and Toes
6. Story Time
Zoom: Let‘s make a puppet.
Zip: Good idea!
Zoo: First,make the haed. Then make the body.
Zip: Look! Arms and legs.
Zoom: Let‘s play wiyh the puppet. Oh, no! Don‘t run away.
6. Culture Halloween
课后练习题
一、根据汉语情景选择相应句子，把序号填在相应横线上
1. 下午碰到熟人时说: ________
2. 表示你见到某人很高兴时说：________
3. 在万圣节那天你对别人说; ________
4. 介绍你的朋友皮得时说：________
A This is Peter B Happy Halloween! C Good afternoon
D Nice to meet you.
二、从所给选项中选择恰当的答案
（ ）1. John: Nice to met you, Mike.
Mike:_______
A Good afternoon, John. B My name is Mike. C Nice to meet you, too.
( ) 2. Zoom: Hello! Zip. Where is your nose?
Zip: ________
A Here it is. B Touch your nose C See you
( ) 3. Chen Jie: Let‘s go to school.
Ling: ________
A No B ok C Hi!
三、连词成句
1. is hand your where
_____________________________
2. Make head let‘s the
_______________________
3. You to nice meet
______________________
4. is Mr Wu this
_______________________
Unit Three Let’s Paint Section A
1. Words and phrases
blue、green、yellow、red、purple
2. Dialogues
Mr Black: Good morning, Miss Green. How are you?
Miss Green: Fine, thank you. Mr Black, this is Miss White.
Mr Black: Nice to meet you.
Miss White: Nice to meet you, too.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
3. Let‘s do
Show me your crayon. Show me your blue crayon.
Show me your yellow crayon. Show me your green crayon. Show me your purple crayon.
4. Song :Who is wearing yellow today?
5. Handwork: 涂小丑
课后练习题
一、从第二栏中找出一栏中的答语。（www.61k.com)将字母代号填入题前括号内 （ ）1. How are you? A Goodbye, Chen Jie.
( ) 2. Nice to meet you. B Fine, thanks.
( ) 3. Good afternoon. C My name is Dick.
( ) 4. What‘s your name? D Nice to meet you, too.
( ) 5. Goodbye, Miss White. E Good afternoon.
二、 连词成句
1. too meet to you nice
______________________
2. White is Miss this
______________________
3.my crayon purple show your
______________________
5. are how you
______________________
6. name what your is
______________________
三、 中英文配对
1. a red pencil A 一个紫色的书包
2. a purple bag B 你的绿色蜡笔
3. your yellow ruler C 一只红铅笔
4. your green crayon D 你的黄色尺子
Section B
1.Words and phrases
black、white、pink、brown、orange
2.Dialogues
Sarah: Hi, Mike!
Mike: Hi, Sarah! How are you?
Sarah: Fine , thanks. How are you?
Mike: I am fine. Thank you.
Sarah: Let‘s paint!
Mike: Great!
Mike: Bye, Mom!
Mom: Bye!
3.let‘s Do
Black ,black. Stand up. Pink, pink. Sit down.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
[www.61k.com）touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Sarah: Look! Zoom and Zip!
Sarah: Who are you?
John: I‘m John.
Mike: My name is Mike.
Sarah&Bai ling: Hey!
John&Mike: Bye!
2. chant and find
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
What‘s in the picture? Look, look,look!
A pencil, a ruler. A little red book.
Pencil-case, sharpener, bag. Look, look, look!
Eraser, crayon, pen. And a big blue book.
3. Chant and color
Color this clown, up and down. Hands pink, ears brown. Face white, eyes blue, hair red , mouth too.
Nose purple, feet grey,
Body orange, hip hooray! Legs black,car yellow, Happy, happy,happy,happy fellow!
4. Song : How are you?
Unit Four We love animals
Section A
1. Words and phrases
monkey、dog、duck、panda、cat、rabbit
2. Dialogues
A: Look! I have a rabbit.
B: Cool!
A: Look! I have panda!
C: Super!
A: Look! I have a monkey.
D: Great!
A: Look! I have a zoo.
E: Wow!
3. Let‘s do
Act like a cat. Act like a duck. Avt like a panda. Act like a monkey. Act like a rabbit. Act like a dog.
4. Song: Old MacDonald
一、连词成句
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
1. look Bird have I a
____________________
2. your mouth touch
______________________
3. I a look may have
________________________
5. at the cat look
_______________________
二、给下列句子找出合适译文
（ ）1. 我有一只小狗。（www.61k.com)
A I have a duck B I have a dog C I have a cat
( ) 2.我有一只兔子。
A I have a rabbit B I have a dog C I have a monkey
( ) 3. 我喜欢熊猫。
A I have a panda B I like panda C Panda is lovely.
Section B
1 Words and phrases
panda、pig、bird、elephant、bear、mouse、squirrel
2.Dialogues
A: I have a Teddy bear.
B: Oh, really? May I have a look?
A: Sure. Here you are.
B: Thank you. Oh, it is nice! I like it.
A : Thanks.
3.Let‘s do
Hunt like a mouse. Walk like an elephant.
Climb like a bear. Jump like a squirrel.
Fly like a bird.
6. Let‘s chant
Look at the cat. It is fat.
Look at the pig.It is big.
Look at the monkey. It is funny.
Look at the mouse, in my house. Ahhh!!!
7. Song : Hop, Brown Squirrel
8. Story time
Zoom: Hello, Pig! Follow me.
Zoom: Hello, Dog!Follow pig. Follow me.
Zoom: Hello . Duck!Follow Dog. Follow pig. Follow me.
Zoom: Hello, Rabbit!Follow duck.Follow gog. Follow pig. Follow me. All the animals: Don‘t follow Zoom.
Zoom: Follow me, please.
一、从下列单词中选择合适单词完成句子
Act bird look white here like
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
1.________ at my tiger.
2. My mouse is _________
3. _________you are.
4. Fly like a ________
5. _________ like a cat.
二、选择正确答案，圈出字母序号
1. What‘s your name?
A My name is Sarah B I‘m fine
2. How are you?
A I‘m 4 B Fine ,thank you.
3. Can I have a hamburger?
A Me too B Sure, here you are
4. Thank you
A You are welcome. B No, thanks.
5. This is John.
A Nice to meet you B ok!
Unit Five Let’s Eat
Section A
1. Words and phrases
cake、hamburger、hot dog、chicken、French fries、bread 2 Dialogues
A: I like hamburgers.
B: I like hot dogs.
A: Here you are. Hot dogs and hambuegers.
B: thank you.
A: I like French fries.
C: Me Too!
A: Ok! Have some French fries.
B: Thank you.
3.Let‘s do
Show me the hamburger. Pass me the French fries. Cut the bread. Eat the hot dog. Smell the chicken. Make the cake.
5. Song: Let‘s have a picnic Today
课后练习
一、选择填空
1. I _______ hot dogs.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A likes B like C am
2. Where is the plate? ______
A It‘ son the right B It‘s on the left. C It‘s in the middle.
3. What do you like?
A I have hamburgers B I like cakes C It‘s in the middle
4. Thank you.
_______
A No, thanks B You are welcome C Great
5. Can I have ____ bread?
A a B some C eat
二、 给下列英文句子选择合适译文
（ ） 1. Have some milk.
A 请吃蛋糕 B 请喝牛奶 C 请喝咖啡
（ ） 2. you rae welcome
A 你是欢迎 B不用谢 C 谢谢你
（ ） 3. Let‘s drink.
A 让我们一起喝 B 让我们一起吃 C 让我们一起玩
（ ） 4. Can I have some bread?
A 请吃面包 B 你有面包吗？ C 我可以吃面包吗？
（ ） 5. I like cakes.
A 我喜欢蛋糕 B 我喜欢薯条 C 我喜欢辣椒
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（ ） 6. The fork is on the right.
A 叉子在右边 B 叉子在左边 C 叉子在中间
（ ） 7. Drink the juice A 喝可乐 B 喝果汁 C 喝水
Section B
1.Words and phrases
water、milk、Coke、juice、coffee、tea
2. Dialogues
A: Have some juice!
B: No, thanks. I like Coke.
C: Me too.
A: Ok. Here you are.
B: Thank you.
C: You are welcome.
A: Can I have some chicken?
B: Sure. Here you are.
A: Thank you.
B: You are welcome.
3. Let‘s do
Pour the water. Taste the tea. Smell the coffee. Show me the milk. Drink the juice.
4. Let‘s chant: Dinner time
Chicken and fries,
Chicken and fries.
What a surprise!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Chicken and fries!
Smell the chicken,
Taste the fries.
Dinner is ready,
Open your eyes!
5. Song: Noodle Noodle Dumpling
6. Culture; 西餐
The spoon is beside the knife. The knife is on the right. The fork is on the left. The plate is in the middle.
7. Story time
Zoom: Can I have a hamburger?
Chef: Here you are.
Zoom: can I have a cook?
Chef: Sure.
Zoom: Can I have a ice-cream?
Chef: here you are.
Zoom: Mmm….Good!
Zoom: Can I have some French fries?
Chef: Ok. Here you are.
Zoom: Oh, no! My ice-cream!
一、请将代表汉语意思的英语字母填在相应的英语单词前括号里
A 可乐 B 果汁 C 鸡肉 D 牛奶 E 咖啡 F 茶 G 蛋糕 H 热狗 I 汉堡包（ ） .tae ( ) bread ( ) milk ( ) chicken ( ) coke ( ) coffee
( ) cake ( ) hamburger ( ) hot dog ( ) juice
二、 连词成句
1. have can bread some
__________________________
2. cake the make
_______________________
3.like chicken and bread
_________________________
4. is the in plate middle
__________________________
5.welcome are you
________________________
三、将句子按先后顺序排好
（ ） Here you are.
( ) Thank you
( ) Can I have some milk?
( ) You are welcome.
( ) Sure.
Unit Six Happy Birthday!
J 面包
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Section A
1. Words
One、two、three、four、five、six、seven、eight、nine、ten
2. Dialogues
Chen JIe: Hello, Sarah. This is my friend, Wu Yifan.
Sarah: Happy birthday!
Wu: thank you.
Sarah: How old are you?
Wu: I am nine.
Chen: Let us eat the birthday cake.
Wu: Great!
3. Let‘s do
Show me 1 and 2. Show me 3and 4.
Show me 5 and 6. Show me 7and 8.
Show me 9and 10.
4. Song: Ten little Candles Dance
5. Hand work: Happy Birthday card
一、组词并完成句子
1. ekac This _____ is for you.
2. xsi Our lucky number is ______
3. pahyp ______ birthday!
4. otw I‘m ______years old.
5. lodl I like _____.
二、请将代表下列汉语的英语字母填在相应字母前
1.太棒了！ （ ） A Lucky number.
2. 吃蛋糕。［www.61k.com) ( ) B Close the door.
3. 幸运数字。 （ ） C How many gifts?
4. 关门 （ ） D Great!
5. 多少件礼物？ （ ） E Eat a cake.
三 连词成句
1. old you are how
______________________
2. to happy you birthday
_______________________
3. have I can some juice
__________________________
4. am I twelve
____________________
5. yo this for is
__________________________
6. candles many how
____________________________
7. my this is friend
____________________________
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
8. door the open
_____________________________
9. car I have a
______________________________
Section B
1.Words and phrases
balloon、kite、ball、car、plane、boat、doll
2.Dialogues
A: How many balloons?
B: 4
A: How many gifts?
B: 10
A: How many cakes?
B: One cake.
C:This is for you, Zip!
D: Happy birthday!
A: Wow! Thank you.
3.Let‘s do
Bounce the ball. Fly th ekite. Throw the plane. Hold the doll. Drive the car.
Blow up ythe balloons.
4.Let‘s chant
1,2! How are you? 3.4! Close the door! 5,6! Count the sticks!
7,8! Eat the cake! 9,10! Say it again!
5. Song: Happy birthday to you!
6.Story time
Panda: Sh! There is Zoom!
Pig: I have two gifts.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Animals: Supprise!
Bird: Happy birthday to you!
Squireel: This cake is for you, Zoom.
Zoom: Thank you. Let‘s eat the cake!
6. Culture: I‘m from China. Our lucky number is 6. I‘M FROM Canada. Our lucky number is 7.
7. Song: Happy birthday to you!
一、选择填空
1. A：_______ are you? B: I‘m fine.
A How old B How C Who
2. This is ____ you
A on B to C for
3. A: How many fingers do you have? B;_____
A Great B Five C Ten
4. A: Let‘s fly the kite. B: ________
A Great B Thank you C Bye!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5. A: Happy birthday to you, Wu Yifan !
B: _______
A :I‘m fine B Thank you C Good morning
二、 从下列单词汇总找出与所给单词同类的，将徐爱红填入题前括号里 （ ） 1. five A car B cake C cat D pig
( ) 2. coffee A fine B good C six D pig
( ) 3. panda A tae B plane C boat D face
( ) 4. pen A two B tten C pig ruler
( ) 5 eye A four B your C ear D green
三、 连词成句
1. for have gift a I you
___________________________
2. are they where
__________________________________
3. like cat I
________________________________
4.number is my eight lucky
______________________________
6. the car drive
_______________________________
Recycle 2
Let‘s act
Parents: Happy New Year. Miss White!
Miss White: Happy New Year!
Sarah: This is for you!
Miss White: Thank you. I have a gift for you, too.
Mike : Thank you.
Sarah: May I have a look?
Mike : Look! I have a car!
Sarah: Sure! Here you are.
Dog: How many cakes?
Cat:8
Miss White: Have some juice.
Mike: Thank you.
Sarah: Can I have a cake?
Miss White: Sure!
Chirden: Where are they?
Miss White: Oh, no!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
PEP三年级下册教学内容
Unit One `Welcome back to School (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
boy(男孩) 、girl（女孩）、friend（朋友）
2. Where are you from?
I am from America/China.
3. Dialogues
Miss White: Good morning boys and girls!
Boys and girls: Good morning Miss White. Class, we have a new friend today. A: Hi! I am from America.
Boys and girls: Welcome!
4. Phonics
a/ / apple ant
b/b/ boy bag
c/k/ Coke coffee
5. Chant: A B C
A B C , Follow me. It’s easy as 1 2 3.
1 2 3, A B C. It’s So easy as you see!
一、从所给答案中选择最恰当一项，把答案写在括号里。（www.61k.com)
（ ）1. Chen Jie: _______
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Amy: Good morning, Chne Jie.
A Goodbye B Good morning C Good afternoon
( ) 2. Miss White: Nice to meet you again.
Mike: ______]
A Nice to meet you,too. B Thank you C Welcome
( ) 3. Mr Black: Happy Women’s Day!
Miss White:________
A Thank you B Happy Women’s Day, too. C It’s ok
( ) 4. Bai ling :Where are you from,Amy?
Amy:________
A I’m ok B I’m Amy C I’m from America
二、 给A 栏各句子找出合适的答语
（ ） Where are you from? A ok
( ) Nice to see you. B Thank you
( ) Hi C Morning
( ) Goodmorning. D Nice to see you, too.
( ) What‘s your name? E Goodbye
( ) Let‘s go together. F Hello
( ) Goodbye G My name is Sophai
( ) Have some tea, please! H I‘m from China.
Unit One Welcome back to School (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
Teacher(老师)、student（学生）
2. Sentences
Where are you from?
I am from America.
3. Dialogues
Mr Black: Good afternoon.
Students: Good afternoon, Mr Black.
Wu: This is my new friend, Amy.
Mr Black: Nice to meet you.
Amy: Nice to meet you, too. Where are you from?
Mr Black: I am from America.
Amy: Good bye, Mr Black.
Mr Black: Goodbye.
4. Phonics
d/d/ duck dog e/e/ egg elephant
5. Song: Boy and girl
6. Let’s do
A A A , say “OK!” B B B, touch your knee. C C C , look and see. D D D, make a “D”.E E E, drink some tea. A B C D E, come and follow me.
7. Story time
Zip: Let’s play school teacher and student.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Zoom: Ok.
Zip: I’m big. I’m the teacher!
Zip: I’m smart. I’m the teacher!
Zoom: I’m the teacher!
Zip: I’m the teacher! Wait a minute! Can you read this?
Zoom: Sure. “ Iam the student!”
Zip: HA!Ha! You see? I am the teacher!
Zip: Oh,no!
8. Culture : Women’s Day
Unit Two My Family (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Father(dad)（爸爸）、mother(mom)（妈妈）、grandfather(grandpa)（祖父） 、grandmother(grandma)（祖母）、woman（女人）、man（男人）
2. Sentences
(1) Who is that boy? He is my brother.
(2) Who is that girl? She is my sister.
3. Dialogues
A: Who is that woman?
B: She is my mother.
A: who is that man?
B: He is my father.
A: Hi, Mom! This is my friend, Amy.
Mom: Nice to meet you.
B: Nice to meet you, too.
4. Phonics
f/f/ fish father g/g/ girl goose
5. Song: Father and mother
6. Chant:
A B C D E F G. Father, mother and me. C D E F G A B. Sing anf dance under the tree.
一、用所给字母组合单词
1. reobtrn _________ 2. ratfen__________ 3. eragt____________
4. omawn_________ 5. edfirn_________ 6. eosgo_______
二、将下列句子改写成感叹句
1.The flowers are beautiful.
________________________
2. It is a big pear.
_______________________
三、连词成句
1. you to meet nice
______________________
2. she is sister your
______________________
3. that who man is
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
______________________
4. love father I my
_____________________
5. family this my is
________________________
Unit Two My Family (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
Sister(妹妹、姐姐)、brother（哥哥、弟弟）
2. Sentences
A: Who is this girl?
B: Guess!
A: Is she your sister?
B: No, my mom. And this is my grandma.
3. Dialogues
A: Come on, Bai ling. Let‘s watch TV.
B: Great! Who is this boy?
A: My brother.
B: Cool! Who is this girl?
A: Oh! She is my sister.
B: Really?
A: Look! This is my mom. And this is my dad.
B: Wow, how funny!
4. Phonics
h/h/ hot dog hamburger
i/ai/ ice-cream ice
5. Let‘s chant
Father and mother help each other.
Sister and brother play together!
6. Let‘s do
A B C, look and see. C D E, draw a tree. E F G, have a seat.
G H I, fly a kite. A B C D E, read after me. E F G H I, say ― Goodbye‖.
7.Culture
My mom is from China. Dhe uses chopsticks.
My dad is from Canada. He uses a fork and a knife. I can use them all.
8.Story time
Zip: Who is that woman?
Zoom: She is my mother.
Zip: She is beautiful.
Zoom: Thank you. My mom is an actress.
Zip: Really?
Zoom: Wait for a moment.
Zip: Zoom! How beautiful!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zoom: look at me!
Zip: Beautiful!
Parents: Zoom! How beautigful!
Zoom: Ahhh!
一、从所给选项中选择恰当的一项，并将其字母代号填入题前的括号里 （ ） 1. ---This is my friend, Sarah.
-----________
A Good morning B Good bye C Nice to meet you
( )----2. Where are you from?
-----_________
A I‘m Chen Jie B I‘m from Kunming C I‘m ok
( ) ---3._______?
---He is my brother.
A Who is that boy? B Who is that woman C Who is that?
( ) ---4. Let‘s play a game.
----________!
A Wow B Great C Fine
( )---5.___________!
__Thanks.
A Give me a pen B Here it is C Happy Teacher‘s Day
二、用所给字母组合成单词
1.ohw________ 2. lylrea__________ 3.tager_________
4.ressit________ 5.anowm________ 6.esh________
7.atth__________ 8.reohtm________ 9.rehfat_________
三、选词填空
He she
1.________is my mother.
2.________is my sister.
3.________is my brother.
4._________is my grandmother.
5._________is Miss Lee
6._____________is my father.
Unit Three How many?（Section A）
1. Words and phrases
eleven(11)、twelve(12)、thirteen(13)、fourteen(14)、fifteen(15)
2. Sentences
How many cats can you see?
I can see………
3. Dialogues
Wu: Look, Amy! I have a new kite.
Amy: Oh, it‘s beautiful!
Wu: Let‘s fly it!
Amy: OK!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Wu: How many kites can you see?
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Amy: 1. 2. 3…….I can see 12.
Wu: No11. The black one is a bird.
Amy: Oh!
4. Phonics
j/ / jeep jump
k/ k / key kangaroo
5. Sing: One two three four five
一、请给出下列单词的复数
1. kite_______ 2.bird__________ 3.cat_________
4.rabbit_______ 5.pencil_______ 6.knife______
7.pen_______ 8.book______
二、选词填空
In and what how kite a have who can at
1. _____ many pens do you have?
2. I _______a new bag.
3. I _______see five birds.
4. Seven _________five is twelve.
5. Let‘s draw ____picture.
6. Look ______my new pens.
7. ______are you?
8. Open _______and see.
9. Let‘s fly a ________.
10. ________ is one and nine?
三、连词成句
1. new I bag a have
______________________
2. a fly kite let‘s
_____________________
3. do have many you pens how
__________________________
4.see open and it
___________________________
5.one have only I
_________________________
Unit Three How many? (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
eighteen(18)、nineteen(19)、twenty(20)、sixteen(16)、seventeen(17)
2. Sentences
How many pencils do you have?
I have 18.
3. Dialogues
A: Hi, Chen Jie. Look at my new crayons!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
B: Oh, how nice! How many crayons do you have?
A: Guess!
B: Twelve?
A: Open it and see!
B: 123….16! You have 16 crayons!
A: That‘s right!
4. Phonics
l/l/ lock lion
m/m/ milk mouse
n/n/ night nest
5. Let‘s do
J J J, jump, jump, jump. K K K, kick, kick, kick. L L L, la, la,la.
M M M, meow, meow, meow. N N N, no, no, no. L M N, raise your leg.
6. Culture Easter Day
7.Story Time
Zip: Wow! So many apples!
Zoom: Yeah! Let‘s pick up the apples.
Zip: Let‘s have a race.
Zoom: 1. 2. 3.4.
Zip: 1.2.3.
Zoom: 5.6.7…..16.
Zip: 5.6.7….15
Zip: LOOK, I have 15! How many apples do you have?
Zoom: I have 16. I WON!
Zip: Show me plaese.
Zip: Oh, no! I have only 1.
Zip: Ha! Ha! I won!
一、从所给选项中选择最佳答案，填入题前括号里
（ ）1. ----How many sisiters do you have?
----________
A I‘m 2 B I can see 2 C I have 2
（ ）2.— ____ kites can you see?
— Seven.
A How many B How C What
( ) 3.—Let‘s draw a picture.
—______
A Ok B Fine C Thank you
( ) 4. —How many planes can you see?
—_____
A I have 6 B I can see 6 C It‘s 6
( )5. — Look, I have a new bag.
—__________
A It‘s Ok B How beautiful C Oh
( )6. —Let‘s share!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
—___________
A Good idea B Cool C Wow
( ) 7. —How are you?
—_________
A Fine, thanks B It‘s ok C I‘m 9
二、根据A栏，从B栏中选择正确的翻译
A B
( ) 1. 当心 A Good idea!
( )2. 你来自哪里？ B How nice!
( )3. 见到你很高兴。[www.61k.com］ C Let‘s draw a picture.
( )4. 好主意！ D watch out!
( )5. 那个人是谁？ E come in.
( )6. 进来。 F Who is that man?
( )7. 好漂亮! G Where are you from?
( )8.早上好。 H Nice to see you.
( )9. 我们画画吧。 I Good morning.
( )10.我有十五本书 J I have fifteen books.
三、请判断下列对话是否正确，正确的打“F”误的打“T” （ ）1.A How many kites can you see? B I can see two
( ) 2.A Nice to meet you! B How do you do!
( ) 3. A Good afternoon. B Good morning
( ) 4. Where are you from? B I‘m from America
( ) 5. A who is that girl? B She is my sister.
Recycle 1
1.Let‘s act
John: Hello, Chen Jie!
Chen Jie: Hi, John!
Sarah: Who is that boy?
Chen Jie: He is my friend, John.
Amy: Hello, John. I‘M Amy.
John: Nice to meet you! Where are you from?
Amy: I‘m from America. What‘s in your box?
John: Gusee!
Amy: Chocolates?
Chenjie: Cookies?
John: Open it and see!
Amy: Oh, chocolates! How many?
Chenjie: Let‘s count! 1.2.3.4…..20!
John: let‘s share!
Chen jie: Good idea!
Amy: Thanks!
2. Chant:
Let‘s go, boys.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Let‘s go, girls. Let's all be a family.
Who plays father?
Who plays mother?
Who play brother and sisiter?
I am father. I am mother. We are brother and sisiter. Let‘s go,boys. Let‘s go, Girls.
Let‘s all be a famoly.
3.Song: the more we get together
4. Hand work: Make a window card.
Unit Four Do you like pears ? (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Watermelon、peach 、pear 、orange
2. Dialogues
(1)---Do you like apples?
----Yes , very much.
----Here you are .
----thanks.
(3) Mum : Do you like peaches?
Amy : Yes , I do .
Mum: Do you like oranges?
Amy : NO, I do not.
Mum :What about pears ?
Amy : oh , I like them very much.
Mum: let us have some peaches and pears . Amy : OK.
3. Phonics
o /o/ orange ok
p/p/ pear peach
q/ q/ queen quiet
4. Let‘s chant
A B C D E F G. French fries, bread and ice-cream.
H I J K L M N. Hamburgers, hot dogs and chicken. O P Q, O P Q. Let me share with you!
一、从所给选项中选择最恰当的一项
（ ）1. Sarah: Can I have some orange juice, please? Miss White: _______.
A No. it isn‘t B Sure, here you are. C Thanks.
( ) 2. ---Do you like bananas, Bailing?
--- ____, I do.
A Yes B No C Sorry
( ) 3. ----Have some more, Chen Jie?
---- _______
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A Here you are B It‘s ok C No, thanks
( ) 4. A: Let‘s have some oranges and grapes.
B:_______?
A Ok B Yes, I do C No, I don‘t
( ) 5. A: Have some fruits.
B:______
A Sure B Certainly C Thank you
二、用a 或an 填空
1.______orange 2.______boy 3._______eraser
4.______elephant 5._______teacher 6.______egg
7.______apple 8._______pear 9._____peach
三、选词填空
Close listen show pour look clap
1.______the tea 2. ________at me 3._________to me
4.______with me 5.________your eyes 6.________me five.
Unit Four Do you like pears ? (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
Apple、strawberry 、bananas 、grapes
2. Sentences
(1) A: DO you like pears ?
B: No, I don’t Can I have an apple, please?
A:Certainly.
(2) A: Can I have some orange juice, please?
B: Sure. Here you are.
3. Dialogues
Miss White : Have some fruits.
John; Thank you ,Miss White .
Miss White : DO you like bananas ,Chen JIe ?
Chen : Sorry, I do not like bananas . Can I have an apple, please ?
Miss White : Certainly. Have some more ?
Chen : No, thank you.
4. phonics
r/r/ rain rainbow
s/s/ snake squirrel
t/t/ tiger taxi
5. An apple A day
6. Let’s do
A B C D E, clap with me. E F G H I,Close your eye. J k l m n, Show me ten.
L M N O P, listen to me. P Q R S T, pour the tea. Look at me, I can say from A to T.
7. Cultuer Doggy Bag
8. Story Time
Zoom: Wow! 8 dollars. It’s chaep. I want some chicken peas and tomatoes. I want some apples, bananas and oranges.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zip: Do you like milk?
Zoom: Yeah! I like milk, juice and Coke.
Zoom: I’m full. Yeah! I like milk, juice and coke. Doggy bag, please! Waiter: No way!
一、把下面字母重新排列组成单词
1. ecpah__________ 2.rpeag_________ 3. kiel_______
4.mose_________ 5.nkeas________ 6. igret________
二、找对子，用线连接
Apple 葡萄
Pear 西瓜
Grapes 香蕉
Orange 桃子
Watermelon 苹果
Bananas 梨子
Peach 橙子
三、改变其中一个字母使其变成另外一个单词
Bear_____ that ________ beach________ them_____
Live______ an________ mile_______ break________
Unit five Where is my ruler? (Section A)
1. Words
Bus、taxi 、bike 、jeep
2. Sentences
Mike : Guess ! Where is my plane?
Bai ling : In your bag ?
Mike : No !
Bai ling: In your desk ?
MIKE : Yes.
3. Dialogues
MIKE : mom, Where is my car?
MOM : on your desk ?
Mike :No!
Mom : In the toy box?
MIKE : NO !
MOM : look ! it is under the chair.
Mike : OH ,yeah! Thanks, mom .
4. Phonics
u/u/ umbrella under
v/v/ violin vest
w/w/ window wind
5. let’s do
Show me A B C D E. Point to F G H I J. Type J K L M N.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Color O P Q R S. Circle S T U V W. I can say from A to W.
一、 选择正确的译文， 将其字母代号填入题前括号里
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（ ）1. Welcome back to school!
A 欢迎返校 B 欢迎光临 C 这是我们的学校
（ ）2. look at my new crayons!
A 看我的心衬衫 B 过来看一下 C 看我的新蜡笔
（ ） 3. 请喝点可乐。（www.61k.com）
A Please have some water. B Please have some juice. C Please have some cake, please.
( ) 4.Do you like bananas?
A 我喜欢香蕉 B 你爱吃香蕉吗？ C 来点香蕉吗？
（ ） 5. 你有多少支铅笔？
A How many pens do you have? B How many pencils do you have? C Do you have pens?
( ) 6. Can I use your ruler?
A 我可以用一下你的尺子吗？ B 我可以用一下你的笔吗？ C 我可以用一下你的橡皮吗？
二、找出句子的后半部分并使其完整
A desk is in the sky
A car is on the wall
A plane is on the floor
A pen is in the pencilcase
A map is on the road
A book is in the bag
三、请找出不同类的单词
A plane on bike taxi
B under in behind jeep’
C desk bag chair table
D where pencil craon ruler
Unit five Where is my ruler? (Section B)
1. Words
Lamp、walkman 、chair 、desk
2. Sentences
Chen JIe : Where is my bag?
John :In the desk?
Chen: No!
John: On the desk?
Chen: Yes !
3. Dialogues
John : excuse me, Amy. Can I use your pencil ?
Amy: no problem. Where is my pencil? Look, it’s here , under your book. Here you are.John: Thank you!
4. Phonics
x /x/ fox box
y/y/ yellow yo –yo
z/z/ zoo zebra
5. Song : Hide and seek
6. Story Time:
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zip: Let’s paly hide and seek.
Zoom: Great! 12.2.3….10.Are you ready?
Zip: Yes!
Zoom: Where are you? Are you under the table? Are you under the bed?
Are you in the toy box? Where are you ? I can’t find you.
Zip: Ha! Ha! I’m behind you!
7. Cultutre: Children’s Day
一、从所给选项中选择恰当答案
（ ）1. Mike：Where is my book, Dad?
Dad: _______
A Here you are B It’s on the desk C Thank you
( ) 2. Mike: let’s play a game.
Wu:_______
A Great B Hello C look out
( ) 3.Bai Ling: Can I use your pen?
Amy: ________
A No problem B Thank you C It’s on the desk
( ) 4. Miss White: Happy Children’s Day.
Chen Jie: _______
A Happy Children’s Day, too. B Good idea C Thank you.
二、选词填空
Who where what
1. I can’t find my bag. ______is it?
3. __________is that in English?
4. _________is she? Is she Lily?
5. _________is the toy car? Is it in the box?
6. _________is that girl? Doy ou know?
7. Mom, ________is my bag? Do you see it?
三、连词成句
1. bag where is my
_________________________
2. the chair it’s under
________________________
3. are here you
_______________________
4. pencil can use your
_____________________________
5. you are bed under the
____________________________
Unit Six At the zoo (Section A)
1. words
small、big 、long、 short
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2. Sentences
I have big eyes and small ears .
3. Dialogues
Miss White : Come on, children. Look at the elephant!
MIKE: Oh! It is so big!
Miss: Look! It has a long nose and a short tail.
Amy: It has small eyes and big ears.
John: Wow! It’s so big! OH, it’s so funny!
4. Let’s do
Tall, tall, tall! Make yourself tall. Big, big, big! Make your eyes big.
Long long long! Make your arms long. Short, short, short1 Make yourself short!
Small, small, samll! Make your eyes small. Short, short, short! Make your arms short.
5. Chant
PRC,PRC, I’m from China. CAN, CAN, I’m from Canada.
UK, UK, I’m from the United Kingdom.
USA, USA, I’m from America.
一、用所给字母组成单词
1. allt________ 2. ogln________ 3.ered________
4.itla_________ 5.edef________ 6.afiefrg________
二、连词成句
1. they cute are so
_______________________
2. animals don’t the feed
______________________________
3.is deer short the
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
________________________
4. a has dog lily
________________________
三、根据汉语给出对应单词
1.课桌______ 2. 今天_________ 3.喜欢______ 4.十九______
5.动物园______ 6.朋友______ 7.小鸟______ 8.桃子______
Unit Six At the zoo (Section B)
1. Words
tall、giraffe、deer、short
2. Sentences
(1) I have a bird. It is small.
(2) I have a rabbit. It has long ears.
3. Dialogues
Father: Look at the giraffe .
Amy : OH , it’s so tall.
Father : Look at the deer.
Amy : it is short.
Father : you see. The giraffe is tall. The deer is short.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Amy : Yeah. Daddy, you are tall. I am short.
Daddy : you are right.
4. Song: They are in the zoo
5. Let’s chant: A B C D E F G, H I J K L M N, O P Q , R S T, U V W, X Y Z!
Now you can say you're a BC’s . It’s as easy as 123!
6. Story Time
Zip: How many animals do you know?
Zoom: I know all the animals!
Zip: Look!
Zoom: Tiger and lion!
Zip: Yes!
Zoom: Fox and wolff!
Zip: Right!
Zoom: Zebra and horse!
Zip: Good!
Zoom: I know they are monkeys.
Zip: NO!No!
Zoom: The small one is monkey. The big one is a gorilla.
Zoom: Oops!
Recycle 2
1. Let’s act
Girafffe: I am tall. I can get the apples.
Elephant: My nose is long. I can get the pears.
Zoom: I’m strong. I can carry the fruit.
Tiger : I can get the grapes.
Elephant: Wow! So many fruits.
Monkey : Yeah! Let’s count.
Mouse: Four peaches, twelve pears……
Elephant: let’s eat!
Mouse: can ia have a peach,please?
Rbbit: Sure!
Giraffee: I like bananas.
Monkey : Me too.
Monkey: Where is my banana?
Elephant: Look! It’s there.
Rabbit: Ha!Ha!
2. Song: A B C song
一、选词填空
Is am are
1. My father has a new coat. It______ white
2. _________you a pupil? Yes, i_______
3. Who_____I ?
4. That_______Helen. She _______my good friend.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5. ______there any sheep on the grass?
6. Whose shoes______they?
7. _______ she Lucy? No, she ______not
8. My father_________a teacher.
二、按要求完成各题
To(同音词) ______ strawberry(复数形式)__________
That (反义词) ______ are not(简写) ______
I’m(完全形式) ______ big(反义词) ______
It’s(同音词) ______ you’re(完全形式) ______
三、单项选择
（ ）1. Amy: Good afternoon!
Sarah:_______
A Nice to see you B Good morning C Good afternoon D Goodbye
( )2. Tom: Nice to meet you, Kate.
Kate:_______
A How are you? B How do you do? C Nice to see you D This is kate
( ) 3. Herry: How many pencils can you see?
Alice: ___________
A I have six B I can see six C How nice! D Let’s fly a kite
( ) 4. John: Who is that?
Mr Wang: _________
A He is my father B She is my mother C He is my mother D She is my mothe
Pep 四年级上册 Unit one：My classroom（Section A and Section B)
1. Words:
window 窗户, board 写字板, light 灯, picture 图画, door 门, floor 地板, classroom教室,
computer 电脑, teacher‘s desk 讲台, wall 墙, fan 风扇
many 许多的, classmate 同学, have a look 看一看, seat 座位, near在……的旁边, what 什么,
where 哪里, new新的, clean打扫, good idea 好主意, all right好吧, good job 干得好，see you 一会见，look at 看…….
2. Sentences:
(1) Let‘s clean the board/desks/window……….
(2) What‘s in your classroom? A board, two lights, many desks and chairs……..
(3) We have a new classroom. Really? Let‘s go and have a look.
(4) Where is my seat? It‘s near the door.
(5) The wall is white.
3. Chant:
Work and play, work and play.
In the classroom everyday.
Work and play, work and play.
We have fun every day.
4. Letters: Aa Bb Cc Dd Ee Ff Gg Hh Ii
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5. Phonics:
Ff: /f/ fish, French fries, farmer
Gg: /g/ girl, goose, good
Hh: /h/ hot dog, hamburger, hat
Ii: /i/ it, is, his, hit
/ai/ ice-cream, ice water, idea
6.Dialogues
(1)
A: Mike, we have a new classroom.
B: Really? Let‘s go and have a look.
A: Wow! It‘s big. Look, this is my new desk.
B: Where is my seat?
A: It‘s near the door.
(2)
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Wu YIfan: Good morning. Let's clean the classroom. Amy: Good idea.
Zhang peng: Let's clean the desks and chairs.
Amy: All right.
Mike: Let me clean the window.
Chenjie: Let me clean the board.
John: Look at the picture.
Zhang peng: It's nice.
Students: Good morning,Miss White.
Miss White: Wow! It's nice and clean. Good job!
7. Let's do
Open y the door. Turn on the light. Sweep the floor. Clean the window. Put up the picture, Clean the board.
8. Story time
Zoom: OH! There is a bee in our classroom..Where is it? Zip: Look! It's on the light.
Zoom: Where is is now?
Rabbit: It's on the fan.
Zoom: Look! It's on the wall now.
Teacher: What;'s this?
Zoom: It's a bee.
teacher: NO, it's a board. Ah, yes, it's a really bee. Zip:There is a bee on the board.
Zoom: Ha! Ha!
9. Song: In the classroom
练习：
1. 将下列最木重新排列组成一个单词
Ilhtg__________ wne__________ boadr__________ Wwndio_______ aveh_________ cealn___________
2. 选择合适的答案
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（1）Where is my seat? ____________
A It‘s nrear the door. B All right
(2) Let‘s clean the classroom. _________________
A Goodbye B Good idea.
(3) Where arethey?_________________
A They are hot dogs B It‘s a picture
(4) Look at the calssroom._________
A Good morning B It‘s so big
(5) We have a new livingroom. _____________
A Let‘s goand have a look B This is John
Unit two My schoolbag （Section A and Section B)
1. Words:
bag, pencil, pen, book, ruler, pencil-case,Chinese book, English book, math book, schoolbag, story-book, notebook, twenty-one, thirty, thirty-one, forty, forty-one, fifty, too many, colour, fat, may, sure, here you are, heavy, sorry, what is=what‘s, in, on, under, near, guess
2. Sentences:
(1) What‘s in your schoolbag? I have many books in my schoolbag.
(2) What colour is it? Guess!/ It‘s red.
(3) How many books do you have? Too many to count.
(4) I have a new bag/ pencil/ pen/ book/ ruler/ pencil-case………
(5) May I have a look? Sure. Here you are.
(6) My schoolbag is heavy.
(7) What‘s in it?
3. Phonics:
J j: jeep, jacket, jigsaw puzzle Oo: Coke, OK, open
Kk: kite, key, kangaroo Pp: pen, pencil, pencil-case
L l: lion, lock, lamp Qq: squirrel, queue, quiet
Mm: man, mouse, monkey Rr: rabbit, ruler, rice
Nn: nose, nurse, noodles
4. Chant:
(1) Put your notebook under your bag.
Put your pencil in your desk.
Put your pencil-case on your chair.
Put your eraser near your pencil-case.
Put your English book on your head.
(2) How many English books do you have?
Thirty! Thirty! Thirty!
How many picture-books do you have?
Forty! Forty! Forty!
How many story-books do you have?
Fifty! Fifty! Fifty!
5.Let's do
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Put your notebook under your bag.
Put your pencil in your desk.
Put your pencil-case on your chair.
Put your pencil in your desk.
Put your eraser near your pencil-case.
Put your English book on your head.
6. Dialogues：
A: Hi, Chen Jie. I have a new schoolbag.
B: Really? What colour is it?
A: It‘s black and white.
A: May I have a look?
B: Sure. Here you are.
A: What‘s in it?
B: I have many books in my schoolbag.
A: How many books do you have?
B: I have six.
(2)
Zhang peng: My schoolbag is heavy.
Miss white: What's in it?
Zhang peng: Look! 20 story books,32 pencils, 8rulers, and 3 pencil-cases. Miss White: Wow! Good!
Sarah:: My schoolbag is heavy, too.
MIss White: What's in it?
Sarah: 10 sharpeners, 42 crayons, 12 erasers and 35 picture-books. Teacher: Thank you so much!
7.Story Time:
Zoom: Good night,Mom.
Mom: Wait, Zoom. Put away yoiur books.
Zoom: English book,Chinese book, math book......
Mom: Zoom, is everything in your schoolbag?
Zoom: Yes, Mom.
Mom: Good. Have a good dream.
Mom: Some more?
Zoom: NO, Thanks. I'm fill. Oh, my schoolbag is heavy. Teacher: Take out your book,please,.Ah....
Zoom: Oh, sorry.
8.Song : Books and pencils
练习
1.请将下列句子翻译成英文
（1） 我的书包很重
（2） 你有多少本图画书？
（3）里面有什么？
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（4） 我有1块橡皮擦。(www.61k.com］
（5）你能拼写这些单词吗？、
2..根据短文选择答案
This is my room. It‘s small buit very nice. There is a chair., a desk and a bed in the room. The desk is near the window. You can see some books and a box on the desk. The bed is near the desk. There is a map of China on the wall. There is a picture on the wall ,too. I like my small room.
( ) 1. There is ___________in the room.
A a desk B two dbeds C three desks D some windows
( ) 2. __________ are on the desk.
A A book and a box B Some books and a box C A book and some boxes D Some books and a box
( ) 3. The room is __________
A small B nice C big D Both A and B
Unit three My friends(Section A and Section B)
1. Words:
teacher, student, boy, girl, friend，long hair, short hair, thin, strong, quiet, friends, music, science, sports, computer game,
painting, Chinese, like, , photo, name, he‘s=he is, she‘s=she is, you‘re= you are, she, her, he, his, has
2. Sentences:
(1) Who is he? He is……….
(2) What‘s his name? His name is ……..
(3) My friend is strong.
(4) What‘s she like? He has short hair………
(5) What does he like? My friend likes music……….
3. Phonics:
Ss: spoon, snake, student Ww: window, watermelon, walkman
Tt: tiger, TV, teacher Xx: taxi, box, six
Uu: umbrella, under, cup Yy: yellow, yo-yo, yacht
Vv: vest, violin, van Zz: zebra, zoo, zipper
4. Chant:
(1) Listen to music.
Do sports. Paint.
Make friends.
Play computer games.
(2) Friends are like you and me.
Some are old, some are new.
Some like green, some like blue.
Friends are like me and you.
5.Let's do
Listen to music. Do sports. Paint,. Make friends. Play computer games.
6.Dialogues
(1) John: Mom, I have a new friend.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Mom: A Chinese friend?
John: Yes.
Mom: A boy?
John: Yes. He has short black hair and big eyes.
Mom: what's his name?
John: His name is Zhang Peng. Look, this is his photo. He is tall.
Mom: He is strong too.
(2)
A: I have a friend.
B: Boy or girl?
A: A girl.
B: Who is she?
A: Guess. She‘s quiet. She likes music. What‘s her name?
B: Her name is Amy.
A: Yes.
7.Story time:
Rabbit: Wow! What a big turnip! Oh. It's too big. I can't pull it out. Come on friends.Please help me.
Friends: We are coming!
All the animals: One, two, three, pull!
Zoom: I'm strong. Let me help you!
All the animals: Hooray!
8.Songs: Friends
练习
1.选择正确的答案
（1） My friend is a boy_________ has short hair.
A He B she
(2) _________ your best friend?
A What‘s B Who is
(3) What‘s ________name? His name is John.
A your B HIS
(3) He _________math
A likes B LIKE
(4) I have a new________
A friend B friends
2.改变下列单词变成另外一个单词
Wall -----__________ ------高的 fix -------___________-----六
Tor----_____________-----男孩 shirt---__________-----短的，矮的
Pair---_________=------头发
3.阅读短文完成问答、
I have two friends. One is a boy. His name is Jim. He is strong. He has short black hair. He is tall., too. He likes spoirts. The other one is a girl. She is quiet, she has big black eyes and a small nose. She has curly hair. Her name is Alice. She likes music. We are good friends.
( )1. I have ________friends.
A one B two C threee D four
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
( ) 2. W3hat‘s the boy‘s name?
A Jason B Mike C Jim D Peter
( ) 3. The boy has _________
A two big black eyes B a small nose C two big ears D short black hair
( ) 4. What‘s the girl‘s name?
A Sarah B Alice C Kitty D Kate‘
( ) 5.The girl is ________
A tall B strong C quiet D fine
4. 选择正确答案
（ ） 1. 让我来扫地吧？
A Let mer claen the desk. B Letr me clean the classroom C Let me sweep the floor
( ) 2. 这是我的新朋友。（www.61k.com］
A This is my new friend. B This is my new schoolbag. C This is my new calssroom.
( )3 她叫什么名字/?
A What‘s your name? B what‘s her name? C What‘s his name?
( ) 4. 她长着卷发与大眼睛。
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
A She has big hair and big eyes. B She has short hair and small eyes. C She has curly hair and big eyes.
4. 连词成句
（1） my welcome to classroom
(2) to go the kitchen
(3) can see I bedroom a
(4)have I a eraser new
Recycle one
1. Sentences:
(1) How many people are there in you family? Four.
(2) What‘s 10 plus 10? 20 I have got a pen!
(3) How many prizes do you have?
(4) Who‘s your best friend?
(5) Do you like sports?
2. Phonics: A, H, J, K E, B, C, D, G, P, T,V I,Y U, Q, W O
F,L,M,N,S,X,Z
3.Read and act
John: Good morning, Chen jie. Let's clean our classroom.
Chen Jie: Let me clean the desks and chairs.
John: Let me sweep the floor.
John: Look! This is my new schoolbag.
Chen JIe: Oh, your schoolbag is heavy. What's in it?
John: An English book, a Chinese book,a math book, a notebook and 10 story-books.
Chen Jie: 10?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
John: Yes. They are my friend's story-books!
Chne jie: Who is your friend?
John: My friend is quiet. She has curly hair and big eyes.
Chen JIE: I know she is Amy.
John; No. She is tall. And she speaks English well.
Chen Jie: She is tall? What's her name?
John: Uh-uhu! Her name is Sandy White, our English teacher.
Chen JIe: Gee!
Teacher: Ye. I'm your friend.
Unit four my home (Section A and Section B)
1.words:
home, room, school, classroom, window, desk, door, chair, bed,study, bathroom, bedroom, living room, kitchen, phone, bed, sofa, shelf, fridge, table, it‘s=it is, hey, fish, isn‘t=is not, they, aren‘t=are not, they‘re=they are, key, look, please, on, no, here
2. Sentences:
(1) Where is ………? Is it / Are they in the study/bathroom/ bedroom…….?
(2) Is she in the study/bathroom/ bedroom…….?
(3) I like my study/bathroom/ bedroom…….
(4) Your living room is nice.
(5) This is my study/bathroom/ bedroom……
(6) What can you see in my room?
(6) Is this your study/bathroom/ bedroom……
3. Chant:
(1) Go to the living room. Watch TV.
Go to the kitchen. Have a snack.
Go to the study. Read a book.
Go to the bathroom. Take a shower.
Go to the bedroom. Have a sleep.
(2) Mom‘s in the living room.
Dad is too.
I‘m in the bedroom.
Where are you?
Brother is in the kitchen.
Sister is too.
I‘m in the bedroom.
Where are you?
(3) Sit on the sofa. Make the bed. Watch TV.
Answer the phone. Open the fridge. Set the table.
4.Dialogues
(1) A: Is this your bedroom?
B: Yes, it is.
A: It‘s very nice.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
B: I have a cat.
A: Where is she? Is she in the living room?
B: No, she isn‘t.
A: Is she in the study?
B: No, she isn‘t.
A: Look! She‘s here! She‘s in the kitchen.
(2) Mother : Open the door please.
John: OK.
Mom: Where are the keys?
John: Are they on the table?
Mom: No, they aren't. Ate they near the phone?
John: No, they aren't.
John: Look! They are in the door.
5.Story time:
Grandpa: Do you see my glasses?
Father : No,. Are they on the fridge?
Grandpa: Those are not my glasses.
Father: Look! My glasses are on the table.
Grandpa: But where are my glasses?
Father: Look1 Your glasses are on the shelf.
Grandpa: Thank you.
Father: Oh, i'm Dizzy.
Grandpa: Me too. Let's change our glasses.
Father: I can see now.
Grandpa: Me too.
5.Song: My bedroom
课后练习
1. 把下列单词改成小写
DOOR__________ DESK___________ BED_________ SHELF____________ SOFA______________ PHONE___________ CHAIR________________ TABLE___________
2.选择最佳答案
（1）________ they on the table?
A is B Are C Am
(2) _______it in the kitchen?
A Is B Are C Am
(3) ________she in the study?
A Is B is C are
(4) What ________ you see in my room?
A can B is C are
(5) Where _________the keys?
A is B are C am
3.从B 栏中给A 栏选择正确翻译
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（ ） 1. make the bed A 坐在沙发上
（ ） 2.answer the phone B 摆桌子
（ ） 3.Open the door C 接电话
（ ） 4. sit on the sofa D 铺床
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（ ）5. set the table E 开门
5.连词成句
1. my is home this
2. is the cat where
3. kitchen is she in
4. my I like bedroom
Unit five What would you like?
1. Words:
rice, beef, bread, milk, egg, water, fish, chicken，noodle(s), vegetable, soup, knife, chopsticks, spoon, plate, fork Have, dinner, wait, I‘d like=I would like, help, pass, ready, try, food,Show, yummy, hungry, for, thank you, use
2. Sentences:
(1) What would you like? I‘d like some vegetables.
(2) How much? Five yuan.
(3) Help yourself.
(4) I can use chopsticks now. Let me show you.
(5) Can I have some noodles, please? Sure. Here you are.
(6) What‘s for dinner? Wait and see.
(7) Can I help? Yes. Pass me a plate, please.
3. Chant:
(1) Give me a spoon.
Pass me a fork.
Wash the plates.
Use the chopsticks.
Cut with the knife.
(2) Pass me the fork.
Pass me the knife.
Pass me rice and noodles, too.
Pass me the plate.
Pass me the spoon.
Pass me fish and vegetables, to
4.背诵课文：
(1) A: Dad, I‘m hungry. What‘s for dinner?
B: What would you like for dinner?
A: I‘d like some rice and soup. Can I help?
B: Yes. Pass me a plate, please.
A: Here you are.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
B: Thanks. Everything‘s ready.
(2) A: I can use chopsticks. Let me show you.
B: Let me try.
A: Can I have some vegetables, please?
B: Sure. Help yourself.、
（3）Wu Yifan: Dinner‘s ready! Your forks and knives.
John: I can usechopstick.
Mike: Letme try.
Mother: Helpyourself.
WuYifan: Letme show you.
Mike: Oops,sorry.
John: Mm……Yummy.I like Chinese food.
Mike: Me too.
John:we have a good time.
Mike: Thank you.
Mother: Good night.
Wu Yifan:See you tomorrow .
6.Story time:
Cat: Hello. What would you like forlunch?
Zip: I‘d like some rice and fish, please.
Cat: Yuour riceand fish.
Zip: Now I‘d like noodles and bee, please.
Cat: Your noodles and beef.
Zip: Thank you.
Cat: Anything else?
Zip: Some soup and vegetables,please.
Cat: your soup and vegetables.here is your bill.
(The bird takes the bill way.)
Cat: You…..!!!
7.Song: Whatwould youlike?
课后练习：
1.填入所缺字母完成单词
Br_______d (面包) m_________k牛奶 s________p W__________er水 r___i___米饭 f________sh鱼
2. 选择正确答案，并把代号填入括号里
（ ） 1. what would you like for dinner?
A I‘‘d like soemfish. B Thank you C Sure, here you sre.
( ) 2. Can I have some rice,please?
A Yes, you can B Thank you C Sure, here you are
( ) 3. Where are the cakes?
A Yes, they are B No,, they are not C They are on the t6able.
( ) 4. What can you see in the fridge?
A Yes, I can B I can see fish and hotdogs. C No, I can‘t.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
( ) 5. Mom. Can I help you?
A Yes, please B I‘m hungry C wait and see
3. 将下列句子与翻译连线
一切都准备好了 What would you like?
你要点什么？ Here you are
给你 pass me some milk
递给我一些牛奶 I‘m hungry
我饿了 Everythinbg is ready.
4. 连词成句
（1） I some can noodles have
(2) is everything ready
(3) would you what like
(4) me a give spoon
Unit six Meet my family
1. Words:
sister, brother, father, mother, driver, doctor, farmer, nurse， family, parents, uncle, aunt, baby, baseball player People, member, only, puppy, gee, look, young, come, who
2. Sentences:
(1) How many people are there in your family? My family have seven members.
(2) Who are they?
(3) What‘s your father? My father is a farmer.
(4) Come and meet my family! This is my father. He is strong…………
(5) Who is that woman? He looks strong.
(6) Is this your aunt? She looks young.
(7) What are you going to be? I am going to be a…………
3. Chant:
(1) What‘s your father? What‘s your father?
He‘s a doctor. He‘s a doctor.
He‘s a great doctor.
What‘s your mother? What‘s your mother?
She‘s a teacher. She‘s a teacher.
She‘s a super teacher.
(2) Come and meet my family, uncle, aunt, father, mother.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Come and meet my family, grandpa, grandma, sister, brother.
My father is a doctor. My mother is a singer.
My grandpa is a farmer. My grandma is a teacher.
My aunt is a nurse. My uncle is a driver.
My sister is a student. My brother is a baseball player.
4.Dialogues
(1)A: How many people are there in your family?
B: My family has seven members.
A: Who are they?
B: My parents, my brother, my sister, my baby brother and I.
(2)A: Who‘s that man? He looks strong.
B: He is my uncle. He is a baseball player.
A: Is that your aunt?
B: Yes, she is. She‘s a nurse. She likes music.
A: Look! They are my grandpa and grandma.
B: They look young. Are they farmers?
A: Yes, you‘re right.
6. Story Time
Zip: Hi,friends! Welcome to my home.
Rabbit: Look at those photos.
Zip:They are my family photos.My father is a teacher. My mother is a nurse. Rabbit: Great.
Zip: This is my uncle. He is a driver.
Rabbit: He is so strong.
Zip: This is my grandpa.
Cat: Is he a teacher?>
Zip: Yes.
Rabbit: Look! A baseballplayer! Who is that?
Zip: Ha! Ha! It‘s me!
7.song: my fther is a teacher
课后练习
1. 完成下列单词
F___ther m________ther br_____ther
D___ct _____r f_______rme_______ n_____se
2. 完成下列对话
A：Who _______this man?
B:He________my uncle.
A:_______he a driver?
B: Yes,_____ _________
A : __________ this your aunt?
B: Yes, she ________]
A : What ________she ?
B: ______ ______a nurse.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
3.连词成句
What‘s a doctor
He is Bill‘s aunt
That‘s your father?
How many she is
Yes people
4.给下列句子找出合适译文
（1） 他们是谁？
A Who are they? B What are they?
(2) 来见见我的家人
A look! This is my family. B Come and meet my family
(3) 我家有7个成员
A My family has seven members. B We have seven members.
(4) 你父亲是医生吗？
A Is your father a doctor? B My dfather isa doctor.
(5) 他们看上去很年青。(www.61k.com)
A They look strong. B They look young.
Recycle Two
1.Read and act
Chen jie: Merry chrismas!
Mike: Merry chrismas! Look! This is the living room.
John: Wow! How beautiful!
Chen Jie: Wow! So many gifts!
Wu Yifan: How many gifts are there?
Mike: There are37!
Chen Jie: Is this your father?
Father: Merry Chrismas!
Mike: Yes. He is Father Chrismas now.
Wu Yifan: Cool!
Mike: Come and meet my family!
Wu Yifan: Where are they?
Father: They arein the kitchen.
Mike: This is my mother. She is a singer.
Grandpaand garandma: Merry Chrismas!
Chen Jie: Nice to meet you.
Mother: Welcome.
Father: Here is the turkey! What would you like?
Mother:I‘d like some potatoes.
Grandpa:: I‘d like some beef.
Father: Merry Chrisnmas everyone!
Grandma: Merry Chrismas.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2. Song : A merry Chrismas
PEP四年级下册教学内容
Unit One Our School (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Playground(操场)、garden（花园）、library（图书馆）、teacher‘s office（教师办公室）、canteen（餐厅）、computer（计算机）、board（黑板）、fans（电风扇）、lights（日光灯）
2. Sentences
Where is the canteen?
It is on the floor.
3. Dialogues
Chen: Welcome to our school! This is the teacher’s office. That is my classroom.
A: How many students are there in your calss?
Chen: Forty-five.
B: Do you have a library?
Chen: Yes.
A: Do you have lunch at school?
Chen: Yes. The canteen is on the first floor. This way please. Look! This is our playground. Visitors: OH, your school is beautiful.
4. let’s do
Go to the garden. Water the flowers.
Go to the library. Read a story book.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Go to the canteen. Eatsome noodles.
Goto the teacher’s office. HAND IN THE HOMEWORK.
Go to the playground. Playfotball.
课后练习
一、将下列单词补充完整
T__cher's b__rd c_____mp___t_______r
L______t cant____n
二、选择填空
1. Where is the canteen? -----_______________
A This is the teacher B Yes, it is C It's in front of the classroom
2. Do have lunch at school? ---_______________
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
A The banana is yellow B Yes, the canteen is on the second floor
C No, he is my mom
3. ----_____ boys are there in your classroom?
------- Sixteen.
A How many B How much C when
4. Is that a pencil?-----____________
A No, it is B Yes, it is C Yes, it isn't
三、 连线
Let's water the tree Yes ,it is
Where is the teacher's office? Good idea
Is this the music room? It's in front of the classroom
Unit One Section B
1. Words and phrases
art room(绘画室)、computer room（电脑室）、 washroom（洗浴室）、music room（音乐教室）、gym（健身房）、TV room（电视机房）、wall（墙壁）、floor（地板）、picture（图片）、teacher‘s desk（教师办公桌）
2. Sentences
Where is the art room?
It is on the second floor.
3. Dialogues
Wu: look, this is my school.
Mike: Great! Is this the library?
Wu: yes. It is.
Mike: Is that the art room?
Wu: No, it is not. It is the music room. The art room is on the first floor.
Mike: Is that the TV room?
Wu: No, it is not. It is the computer room.
Mike: Wow! Your school is cool!
Wu: thank you.
4. Phonics
a/ei/ cake snake grapes face
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
/ / apple bag cat hat
5. Let’s chant
School days , school days . What a lotoffun!
Read in the library. Draw in the art room.
Eatin the canteen. Play in the gym.
Schol days, schooldays. What a lot of fun!
6. Story time
Principle: welcome to our school. This way,please.
Zip and Zoom: How beautiful!
Principle: This is the library.there are manybooks here.
Zip: I like storybooks.
Zoom: Oh! I’m hungry.
Monkey: Is that the music room?
Principle:Yes, it is.
Zip: Is this the computer?
Princle: No, it’s not the computer room. It’s the teacher’s office.
Principle: THIS IS THE GYM.
Rabbit: It’s big.
Zoom: Is that the canteen?
Principle: Yes,it is. It’s time for linch.
Rabbit: Where is Zoom?
Zip: Zom? I know!
Zoom: I’m full.
一、读句子完成下列短文
This our classroom. It's big. You can see a _______(图片), two _________(黑板）， five _______(灯）and many chairs in the classroom. We study in the classroom. I like my classroom.
二、阅读短文，回答问题
My name is Mary. Welcome to our school. This is the canteen. We have lunch at 12 o'clock. This is the library. There are many pictures and stories books. I like reading books. This is our classroom. There is a computer and a TV in our classroom. This is the computer room. Where is the music room? It's on the second floor. Is that the teacher's office? Yes, it is.
1. Does Amy have dinner at school?
2. How many pictures and books in the classroom?
3. What's in the classroom?
4. Where is the music room?
Unit Two What time is it ?(Section A )
1. Words and phrases
English class、music class 、dinner 、breakfast 、P.E class
2. Sentences
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
4. PHONICS
e/e/ we me he she egg bed desk pen
5. let’s do
Time for breakfast. Drink some milk.
Time for lunch. Have some chucken.
Time for dinner. Eat some rice.
Time for PE. Junp and run.
Time for English. Read and write.
Time for music.Sing and dance.
一、将下列字母重新排序
Reeth__________ vesen________ fvie__________
Egiht__________ inne_________
二、选择填空
（ ） 1. It's ______. It's time for lunch.
A 8:00 B 9:00 C 12:00
( ) 2. -----___________ is it?
----It's 12:00.
A When B W hat time C How many
( ) 3. Wake up1 It's time to _________
A have lunch B have dinner C get up
三、请翻译下列句子
1. Class is over. Let;'s go home.
2. What time is it?
3. Lunch is ready. I have some chicken and tomatoes.
4. This is the playground. It's big.
Unit Two What time is it ?(Section B)
1. Words and phrases
get up、go to school 、go home 、go to bed,Bejing, Lindon, New Work, Sydney
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2. Sentences
Ito is 7:05. It is time to go to school.
3. Dialogues
Mike : Oh! It is 6:00. It is time to get up.
MOM : Breakfast is ready. Hurry. It is 7:05. It is time to go to school! Mike : Oops.
Teacher : What time is it ?
Students : It is 8 o’ clock. It is time for English.
Mike : I am ready!
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
4. Chant
One, two, three, four Wendy’s at the calssroom door.
Five six seven eight. Eating noodles from the plate.
Nine ten eleven, twelve. Tick ,tock, tick, tock.
Wendy’s sleeping beside her clock.
5. Story time
Zip: Wake up., Zoom. It’s time to get up.
Zoom : Mmm. I WANT TO SLEEP.
Zip: It’s time to get up now.
Zip: Look! Whattime is it?
Zoom: It’s eighto’clock. Oh! Dear!
Zip: wait! Wait! Zoom look at that clock.
Zoom: It’s seven o’c lock,naughtyZip!
Zip: April Fool!
6. Song: It’s twelve o’clock
一、 选择填空
（ ） 1. ______ this a library?
A Do B iS c Are
( ) 2. Our classroom is ____ the second floor.
A in B ON c near
( ) 3. It's 2:00. It's time _____ PE classroom.
A on B to C FOR
( ) 4. Whose is the shirt? ---_________
A My friend's B My dad C Your coat
二、 根据提示完成短文
It's _________(七点） o'clock. I put on my red______(衬衣）。［www.61k.com)school. At _________ (10:00), I have _________(英语课).
三、 按要求完成句子
1. Is that a canteen?(肯定、否定回答）
2. 就划线部分提问）
3. 就划线部分提问）
4. The skirt is white. (将下列句子变成一般疑问句）
After__________(早餐）。I go to
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Unit Three Is this your skirt?(Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Brown jacket, white sweater, green skirt, red shirt, yellow T-shirt
2. Sentences
I like the white sweater with the green skirt.
I like the blue dress.
3. Dialogues
Alice: Where is my skirt?
Mike: What colour is is?
Alice: Blue.
Mike: Is this your skirt, Alice?
Alice: Yes, it is. Thank you.
DAD: Where is my T-shirt?
Mike: Is that your T-shirt, Dad?
Dad: No, it’s not.
Mike: Whose is it?
Mom: It’s my T-shirt.
Mike: Whose is this?
Mom: Oh! It’s your baby brither’s!
4. Pronunciation
i/ai/ bike rice kite ice-cream
/i/ milk fish pig window
5. Lte’s do
Put on your T-shirt. Hang up your skirt.
Take off your jacket. Fold your dress.
Wash your shirt. Put away your sweater.
一、 选词填空
( green red white jacket shirt dress pants)
Where is my_________(衬衣）？ And where are my ________( 外衣）的） skirt. My shoes are on the shelf.
二、 选词填空
（ ） 1. Those ________ white socks.
A are B IS c am
( ) 2. _________is it? ---It's green.
A What time C What colour C WHOSE
( ) 3. Is this your_________?
A shoes B dress C Socks
( ) 4. Is this your coat? ----____________
A No, it's not B YES, it is C No, they are not.
三、 连线
Are these your shorts? It's on the bed.
Is this your jacket? It's red.
and ________（ 白色
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Whose sweater is that? No they are not.
Where is my shirt? It's mine.
What colour is it? Yes, it is.
Unit Three Is this your skirt?(Section B)
1. words and phrases
jeans, shorts, pants, socks, shoes
2. Sentences
Where are my socks?
What colour?
White.
3. Dialogues
Mom: Look at these, John?
John: What are they?
Mom: These are your baby pants.
John: Wow! They are so small. And those are my shoes?
Mom: Yes.
John: But what for?
Mom: Our neighbour has a new baby!
4. Chant:
My shirtis red. My jacket is blue.
My dress is odl. Mysweater is new.
My socks arewhite. My shoes aretoo.
Mypants areold. Myshorts arenew.
5. Song: Myclothes
6. Stiry time:
Son: Dad, can I use your T-shirt?
Dad: Certainlyt! But wahtfor?
Son: We have a costume show.
Mom: really?
Son: Firs, tie the sleeves. Then, cut two small holes for my eyes, and cut two big holes for my arms.
Son: Now letme draw something on ot. How do I look?
Dad: Wow! You will be the star.
Mom: Youlookgreat!
Recycle One
1. Read and act
Sarah: Wehave a sgow today.
Wendy: What show?
Amy: A fashion show.
Wendy : What time?
Amy: At four o’clock.
Wendy: On the palyground?
Sarah: No, in the gym.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Chgen&Zhang: Just wait and see.
Mike: Look at my T-shirt.
John& Wendy: Oh! It’s newspaper.
Students: Great!
John: This is my vest.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Amy: Cool! They are shoe boxes!
Mike: Wonderful!
Chen: This is my dress. It’s paper
Sarah: It looks like a fish. It’s very pretty!
Students: it’s your turn now.
Zhang: Oh. I have a ballon hat.
Mike: What? Ballon?
Zhang: Look! Oh! Myhat!
2. Song:What tiome is it?
一、 翻译下列句子
1. 一条蓝色的裙子
2. 一条白色的裤子
3. 红色的鞋子
4. 这是你的夹克衫吗？
二、 判断对错
Jack's father is mad. His room is ina mess. He always says:" Clean yur room!" Jack puts his toys under his bed. Jack puts his white T-shirt and blue coat under his bed. Jack puts his shoes and socks under his bed. Jack puts his books on his table. He says: " My room is clean now."
( ) 1. Jack cleans his room.
( ) 2. Jack has a blue coat.
( ) 3. Bob puts his shoes and socks under the bed,
( ) 4. Jack's father is angry.
Unit Four It’s warm today(Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Weather, warm, cold, cool, hot
2. Sentences
Good morning. This is the weather report. It’s cool in Lhasa.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
3. Dialogues
Mike: Mom, can I wear my new shirt today?
Mom: No, you can’t, It’s cold.
Mike: Mom, can I wear my new
Mom: No, you can’t. It’s cold today.
Mom: It’s warm today. You can wear your new shirt,
Mike: It’s hot today. Can I wear my T-shirt?
Mom: Yes, you can.
4. Pronunciation
o/ou/ hole home nose rose
/o/ box fox orange lock
5. Chant:
Mm! It’s warm today! Take off your jacket!
Phew! It’s hot atoday! Put on your T-shirt!
Ooooh! It’s cool today! Put on your sweater!
Brr! It’s cold today! Put on your coat!
一、写出下列单词的中文意思
Weather( ) close( ) sunny( ) hot( Today( ) warm( ) snowy( ) put on(
二、选择填空
( ） 1. What's the matter John? --____________
A I feel sad B No C This is my friend
( ) 2. What's the weather like today? ---____________
A It's sunny day B It's white B It's big
( ) 3. It's warm today. I can ___________
A wear my shirt B close the window C take my coat
( ) 4. It's sunny_______ Bejing.
A on B at C in
三、 连线
What's the weather like today? It's sunny
Is it hot in kunming? Yes, they are. What colour is the shirt? No, it isn't.
Can i wear the new jeans? Yes,, you can. Are these your shoes? It's purple.
Unit Four It’s warm today(Section B)
1. words and phrases
rainy, snowy, windy, sunny, cloudy
2. Sentences
Here is the world weather. It is rainy in London.
3. Dialogues
Amy: Hello.
Edward: Hi, Amy. What are you doing?
Amy: Not much.
) )
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
一、 根据提示完成短文
Weather cold raincoat hot cloudy cool snowy warm sunny rainy
This is the weather roport. It’s _______(多云的) and cold in KunmIng. You must wear a coat. It’s ____(下雨) i你Bejing. You must take your umbrella.. it’s _______(晴天) in Hong Kong., you muat wear sunglasses. It’s ____(下雪) inSydney. I
二、阅读短文并回答问题
Today is Sunday. The weather reports says: It’s snowy today. It’s cold. John puts on his new coat and boots. He goes to the garden. The whole land is white. It’s very beautiful. John and his father make a snowman. Look, the snowman has a red nose. His eyes are big. He wears a black hat. It’s funny. John like shim very much. He is happy.
1. What day is it today?
2. How is the weather like today?
3. What colour is the land?
4. What are John and his father do?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
4. What colour is the Snowman’s nose?
Unit Five How much is it?(Section A)
1. Words and phrases
Colourful, pretty, cheap, expencive
2. Sentences
Look at that dress. It’s pretty.
Yes, it is.
3. Dialogues
Mom: Amy, look at that dress. It’s colourful.
Amy: Yes, it is. It’s very pretty.
Assistant: Can I help you?
Mom: Yes. How much is this dress?
Mom: Oh, that’s expensive.
Amy: I like it, Mom.
Mom: Sorry, Amy. It’s too expensive.
4. Pronunciation
u/ / student cute music tube
/ / bus umbrella toothbrush cup
5. chant:
How much is tahtcoluor dress?
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Very expensive, very expensive.
How muchis that prettyskirt?
Very expensive, very expensive.
How muchis this yellow shirt?
Very cheap, very cheap.
Good! I want this shirt.
一、 选择填空
（ ） 1. --________? --- It’s 30 yuan.
A What colour is is? B How much is it? C How many is it?
( ) 2. Can I help you? --- Yes, _______
A a pair of shoes B Help yourself C have a good time
( ) 3. The coat is colouful. And It’s only 4 yuan. It’s _______
A dear B expensive C cheap
( ) 4. These ________are nice. I will take them.
A shoes B coat C dress
( ) 5. This ________is cool.
A jacket B noses C BOOTS
二、 搭配下列句子
Can I have some cakes? Yes, I want that pants. How much is the sweater? They are 20 yuan. Can I help you? Sure, here you rae. How much are those shoes? It’s 7 yuan.
How old is your sister? She is five years old.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
二、 阅读对话，判断对错
A: Can I help you?
C: Yes, I want a pair of boots.
A : What colour do you like?
C: I like red.
A : What size is it?
C: Size four.
A : How about this one?
C: They are nice. How much are they? A: They are 40 yuan.
C: Ok. I will take them.
A: Thank you!
C: Byebye.
( ) 1. Chen jie wants to buy a pair of shoes.
( ) 2. Chen jie like red.
( ) 3. Chen jie likes the boots very much.
( ) 4. ChenJie is at home.
Unit Five How much is it?(Section B)
1. words and phrases
boots, slippers, sandals, sneakers
2. Sentences
Can I help you?
Yes. I want a pair of sneakers.
3. Dialogues
Assistant: Can I help you?
Mom: Yes, please. A pair of sneakers for my son. Assistant: What size?
Mom: Size five.
Assistant: How about this pair?
Mom : Are they nice, john?
John: Yes, Mom. I like them.
Mom: Are they all right?
John: Yes, they are.
Mom: How much are they?
Assistant: They are thirty-five yuan.
Mom: Ok, we will take them.
4. Let’s do
Put onyour sneakers. Run in the park.
Put on your sandales. Wiggle your toes. Put onyour boots. Splashin the puddles. Putonyour slippers. Dance in your room.
5. Song: The coatin the window
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
6. Story time:
Boss: Zoom, do a good job.
Zoom: Noproblem.
Zoom:Can I help you?.
LADY: Yes. I want to se that skirt. It’s pretty, isn’t it?
Zoom: Yes,it’s colourful, too.
Lady: It’s sixteen, right? I’ll take it.
Zoom:No.
Lady: Then how much is it?
Zoom: It’s ninety-one. Sorry , Miss. I made a mistake.
Boss: Zoom, you are fired.
Zoom: But,….
一、 选择填空
( ) 1. What _______those? --- They are boots.
A are B IS c am
( ) 2. ______ people are there in your family? ----Three
A How old B How much C How far
( ) 3. Are____ minkeys? ---Yes, they are.
A this B THAT c THOSE
( ) 4. Are they ________? ---No, they are sheep.
A cat B mouse C goat
( ) 5. How _______ are there on the farm? --- Fourteen.
A hens B cow C PIG
二、 据提示完成短文
Yhis is the farm. I can see two (小狗)________. And there are five (奶牛) ______ under the tree. And here are five (鸭子)_______ in the lake. And over there, there are ten(猪)________ in the house.
三、 将下列单词填入空格
Goats farm big how many these
A: This is my _______
B: What are_______?
A: They are cucumbers.
B: Are they horses?
A: No, they aren’t. they are _______
B: ________ cow s do you have?
A: Two hundreds.
B: Your farm is ________
Unit six At a farm(Section A)
1. Words and phrase
Sheep, horse, hen, goat, lamb
2. Sentences
What are they?
They are goats.
3. Dialogues
Mike: OH, this farm is so big, Are they sheep?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Farmer: No, they are not. They are goats.
Sarah: Are they horses?
Farmer: No, they are not. They are donkeys.
Mike: Look at the hens. They are fat.
Farmer: Yes, they are.
John: How many cows do you have?
Farmer: one hundred.
John: Wow!
4. Pronunciation
a/ei/ / /
cake hat
e/i/ / e /
me bed
i/ai/ /i/
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
kite milk
o/ / /o/
nose box
u/ / / /
student bus
5. Let’s do
Feed the hens. Ride a horse.
Milk a cow. Sheara sheep. Hold a lamb.
一． 根据单词写出单词。［www.61k.com]
1. A: ________ ________ ( 多少 ) cows do you have ?
B: I have ________ . ( 20 只 )
2． _________( 什么 ) are they ? They are _________ .( 绵羊 )
3. I see five _________ ( 猫 ), eight ________ ( 狗 ), ten ________ ( 猪 ), seven ________ ( 鸭子 )
and three _________ .( 兔子 )
4．A: How many __________ () are there ?
B: ______________ . ( 12 只)
5 . Are these ______________ ？ (西红柿)
Yes, ________ _________. No , ________ _________.
二． 根据问题，写出答句。
1. How many goats are there ? (十五只)
————————————————————————————
2．What are those ? ( 黄瓜 )
3．Are those potatoes ？ （否定回答）
4．What do you see in the picture ? （ 3 只鸭子， 4只兔子）
___________________________________________________________5. What are they ? (母鸡)
三、阅读对话，判断句子与对话内容是否相符，相符的打勾（√），不相符的打叉（×）。 Dear Granny,
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Thank you for the new sandals. They are cool! It is hot in Hangzhou. It’s sunny too. I can wear my sandals. I have a sweater. My old sweater is too small. I want to buy a T-shirt. It is thirty yuan. I think it is cheap. What is the weather like in Harbin? Is it hot?
Love,
Sarah
1．It is cold in Hangzhou. ( )
2．Sarah has a new sweater. ( )
3．The T-shirt is cheap. ( )
4．Sarah wants to buy a pair of sandals. ( )
5．It is hot in Harbin. ( )
Unit six At a farm(Section B)
1. Words and phrases
Tomato, cucumber, potato, onion, carrot
2. Sentences
Look at the cucumbers. They are fresh!
Yes, and the potatoes are big.
3. Dialogues
Sarah: Are these tomatoes?
Farmer: Yes, they are.
Mike: What are these?
Farmer: They are carrots.
John: LOOK! Are they potatoes?
Farmer: No, they are not.
Mike: What are these?
Farmer: They are onions.
John: Are these cucumbers?
Farmer: Yes, they are.
4. Chant:
I liketomatoes. I like tomatoes. Juice and red.
I like potatoes. I like potatoes. Tasty and brown.
I like carrots. I likecarrots. Yummyand orange.
I like cucumbers. I like cucumbers. Tender and green.
I don’ t like onions. I don’t like onions. Smellyand white.
5.Read and act
Miss White: Let’s have a picnic tomorrow.
Students: Yeah!
Miss White: Tomorrow will be warm and sunny.
Students: Hurray!
Sarah: What do you want to bring?
Chen: I wantto make a salad.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Amy:Me too..
Chen: Let’s go shopping.
Sarah: Let’s go.
Assisstant: Can I help you?
Sarah: Yes, I wantone onion and two carrots.
Chen: Four cucumbersa and four tomatoes.
Amy: I wantone apple , two oranges, two bananas and three pears. How much are they? Assistant: That’s eihtyuan.
Miss White: Look, I have some fruit.
Amy:Me too.
John: I have chicken and beef.
Mike: I have bread and cakes.
Zhang: I have cookies and drinkes. What do you have?
Sarah: Guess.
Wu: Hot dogs?
Sarah: No.
Zhang: Hamburgers?
Sarah: No. I have salad.
Wu: Great! I like salad.
Zhang: Look at the cows. Thay want to sharethe food, too.
Sarah: Yes. They are hungry.
Miss White: It’s windy now.
5. Song: Animals on the bus
一、 选择填空
（ ） 1. How many ______can you see?
A apple B cats C PIG
( ) 2. How much is the skirt? --__________
A It’s 20 yuan B They are 5 yuan C They are yellow
( ) 3. I LIKE SPRINNG. It’s ________
A hot B warm C COLD d cool
( ) 4. What kind of fruit do you like?--________
A I like pig B I like apple C I like dress
二、翻译下列句子
1. I like pears. I don’t like grapes.
2. It’s sunny today.
3. Mom, can I wear my jeans?
4. Those pants are cheap.
四、 阅读短文
It’s six o ‘clock. It’s time to go home. I am in a bus on a sunny day, and an old woman with a dog gets on the bus. It is a samll dog and its feet are not clean.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
I don’t want the dog to sit near me. But the olkd woamn says to the conductor that she
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
will pay for the dog. Can she sit here like the other people?
The conductor looks at the old woman says: “Yes, but he must not put his feet on the
chair.”
1. How is the weather like today?
2. What’s the dog like?
3. How does the writer go home?
4. can the dog sit like the other people?
Pep 五年级上 Unit one: My new teacher (Section A and section B)
1. Words:
young 年轻的, funny 滑稽可笑的, tall 高的, strong强壮的, kind和蔼的, old 老的, short矮的, thin 瘦的, who’s=who is, Mr先生, what’s=what is, like喜欢, he’s=he is, strict严格的, smart聪明的, active积极的, quiet安静的, she’s= she is, very很，非常, but 但是, from 从，来自, Canada 加拿大, know 知道, principal 校长, university student 大学生, Miss 小姐；夫人；女士, so much 很；非常, fun 有趣，
2. Sentences:
(1) Do you have a new teacher? Yes. We have a new math teacher.
(2) What‘s he/she like? He/She is tall/short/strong……….
(3) Who‘s your art teacher? Mr Hu.
(4) Is she/he young/old…………? No, she‘s old.
(5) Who is that young lady? She is our principal.
(6) That is our new science teacher.
(7) I‘m your new music teacher.
3. Phonics:
(1) ea: /I:/ peach, tea, seat, jeans
(2) ee:/I:/ beef, sheep, queen, sleep
(3) bl:/bl/ blue, black, block, blow
(4)br:/br/ bread, brown, library,break
A sheep eats beef and drinks green tea. Eat your meat and your peach!
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A black bird eats black bread.
4. Chant:
(1) My math teacher is very smart. (2) Who is your teacher?
My English teacher has a kind heart. Mrs Heart.
My P.E teacher is very strong. Is she kind?
My music teacher sings nice song. Yes! And she is smart.
They help us learn. They help us play. Who is your teacher?
When school is over, I want to play. Mr Rice. Is she strict? Yes, but he is nice.
5. Dialogues：
(1) A: Who’s your math teacher?
B: Mr Zhao. He is from Canada.
A: What’s he like
B: He’s thin and short. He’s very kind.
(2) A: Who’s that young lady?
B: She’s our principal.
A: Is she quiet?
B: No, she isn’t. She is very active.
A: Is she strict?
B: Yes, she is, but she’s very kind.
6.Read and write
(!)zhang : I have three new teachers.
Tim: Who are they?
Zhang: A science teacher, an art teacher and an English teacher.
Tim: Who is your English teacher?
Zhang: Mr Carter. He is from Canada.
Tim: What’s he like?
Zhang: He is tall and strong. He is very funny.
Tim: I know. He is my father.
Zhang: Really?
(3) Jim: I have a new math teacher. her calss is so muchfun.
John: Really? What’s she like?
Jim: She is younng and pretty. She is a university student.
John: Is she quiet?
Jim: No, she isn’t .she is very active.
John: Is she strict?
Jim: Yes, she is, but she is very kind.
John: Cool!
6. Song: My new Teacher
7. Story Time:
Zip: We have a new PE teacher!
Zebra: Really? What’s he like?
Monkey: Is he tall and strong?
Zip: I don’ t know. He was a football player.
Dog: He is tall and strong. That ‘s for sure.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zip: Shoot!
Zoom: Ah! I missed it!
Rabbit: Can I join you?
Zoom: You arethin and short.? Can yuou play football?
Rabbit: Let me try.
(Rabbit scores ten points)
Rabbit: Ten to three! We won!
Zip: You aregreat!
Dog: Our new PE teacher is a fotballplayer,too. He is tall and strong.
Rabbit: I’m your new PE teacher.
Animals: Ah?!
1. 填入空缺单词
S_____art(聪明的) act____ve(积极的) you______g(年轻的)
St______ict(严肃的) prin______ipal(校长) str_______ng(强壮的)
Qu___et (安静的) tea______her(老师) pr______tty(美丽的)
2. 按要求完成下题
Young(反义词)________ tall （反义词）_______ thin (反义词)__________
What is (缩写)_________ who is (缩略形式)________ beautiful (同义词)___________ Girl (对应词)____________ kind(反义词)______________
3.填空
What who where when how
(!)________ is that man? ---- He is our teacher.
(2) __________ is the bookstore? ----- It‘s near the bus stop
(3) _________ do you go to school? ----I go to school on foot.
4. 选择相应的译文
（ ） 1. Do you have a new teachers?
A 你是老师吗？ B 你有新老师吗？ C 你是新老师吗？
（ ） 2. She is tall and pretty.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
A 她很高 B 她很高很漂亮 C 她很瘦
（ ） 3. Our English teacher is very smart.
A 我们数学老师很聪明 B我们英语老师很漂亮 C 我们英语老师很聪明。［www.61k.com）
5. l连线
Kind 强壮的
Strong 数学
Math 和蔼的
Music 聪明的e
Smart 艺术
Art 音乐
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Unit two My days of the week
1. Words:
Monday(Mon), Tuesday(Tue), Wednesday(Wed), Thursday(Thu), Friday(Fri), Saturday(Sat), Sunday(Sun), day,
have, on, do homework, watch TV, too read books, What about……..?Moral Education, Social Studies, tomorrow, often, love, do house work, yeah,
Play computer games, wait,
2. Sentences:
(1) What do we have on Mondays? We have English, math and P.E……..
(2) What day is it today? It‘s Monday.
(3) What day is tomorrow? Tomorrow is ……..
(4) What do you do on Saturdays? I watch TV, do my homework and read books.
(5)What classes do you like? I like……….
(6) Which day do like? I like …………….
3. Chant:
(1) Monday, Monday, math on Monday.
Tuesday, Tuesday, art on Tuesday
Wednesday, Wednesday, computer on Wednesday.
Thursday, Thursday, P.E on Thursday.
Friday, Friday, my favourite day.
(2) Saturday, Saturday
What do you do on Saturdays ?
I often paint or watch TV.
Sunday, Sunday
What do you do on Sundays?
I read books or play computer games.
Sunday is sweet for me.
4. Phonics:
(1) ow: how, town, brown, now (5) Chant: A brown cow has a crown.
(2) ou: our, mouth, mountain, house Our loud mouse has a big mouth.
(3) cl: clock, class, clean, close Clean crows cry, clean clothes dry.
(4) cr: cry, cream, crow, crop
5. Dailogues
(1) A: What day is it today?
B: It‘s Wednesday.
A: What do we have on Tuesday?
B:We have English, math and science on Tuesday.
(2) A: What do you do on Saturdays?
B: I watch TV on Saturdays
A: What about you?
B: I do my home work.
6. Read and write
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(!) Mike: What day is it today?
Mom: It‘s Wednesday.
Mike: Hmm…We have Chinese ,art and math on Wednesday.
Mom: Wait! To morrow is Thursady. What do you have on Thursdays? Mike: Oops! We have English , math and science on Thursdays.
(2)Aunt: It‘s 8:00 It‘s time to get up.
Zoom: What day is it today,Aunt Cathy?
Aunt: It‘s Saturday. What do you do on on Saturdays?
Zoom: I want TV on Saturdays. I love Saturdays.
Aunt: Yes,and ?
Zoom: Oh, yeah, I play computer games.
Aunt: And?
Zoom: I do my homework.
Aunt: That‘s right!
Zoom: What about you. Aunt Cathy?
Aunt: I do my homework, too.
Zoom: What?
Aunt: I do my homework!
7. Song: My days of the week
8. Story time:
Zoom: It‘s a new school year. I need to do some shopping.
Zip: I‘ll help. Wehave English on Mondays and Wednesday.
Zoom: I need some notebooks and pencils.
Zip: We have Pe On tuesadys.
Zoom: I wanta new pair of sneakers.
Zip: OnThursadys we have art calss.
Zoom: I need a box of crayons.
Zip: We have math on Fridays.
Zoom: Oh, I need a new ruler and a calculator.
Zip: What do you do on weekebds?
Zoom: I often playfootball. I‘d like a new football. Oh, I‘m sorry, Zip. Zip: What‘s the matter?
Zoom: I don‘t have enough money.
Zip: Ok! I‘ll put the football back.
Zoom:Oh, no!
课后练习
1. 翻译下列短语
做作业__________ 看电视__________ 做家务_____________ 玩电脑游戏_____________ moral education__________________
2. 连词成句
（！） what do we on have Monday
(2) often I TV watch Sundy on
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(3) have Tuesday I on Math
(4) to is it time to bed go
Unit three What’s your favourite food?
1. Words:
eggplant, fish, green beans, tofu, potato, tomato, for, lunch, we, tasty, sweet, sour, fresh, salty, favourite, fruit, grape,
they’re=they are, don’t=do not, cabbage, pork, mutton, healthy, menu, sound, I‘d like=I would like, now,
have to, eat, tasty
2. Sentences:
(1) What would you like for lunch? I‘d like ………….
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(2) What‘s your favourite food? Mutton.
(3) What do you have for lunch? I have eggplant.
(4) It‘s tasty./ They are sour./ The beef is too salty.
3. Chant:
(1) What would you like for lunch?
Cabbage, green beans or eggplant?
I‘d like eggplant, please.
What would you like for lunch?
Mutton, tofu or beef?
I‘d like Mutton, please.
(2) The apples are sweet.
The potatoes are salty.
The grapes are sour.
The fish is fresh.
They are tasty and yummy,
And healthy for me!
4. Dialogues
(1) A: I’m hungry.
B: What do you have for lunch today?
A: I have eggplant and tomatoes. What about you?
B: I have onions and green beans.
(2) A: What’s your favourite fruit, Monkey?
B: I like apples. They’re sweet.
A: I like fruits. But I don’t like grapes. They are sour.
5. Phonics:
ow: window, yellow, snow, grow
oa: coat, boat, goat, road
fl: floor, flower, flag, flow
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
fr: fruit, frog, from, fridge
5.Chant:
A slow flow makes flowers grow.
The goat wears a coat as he sits in a boat.
A frog frightens a flat flower on the floor.
6. Read amd write
(!)Mom: What do you have for lunch on Mondays?
Amy: We have tomatoes. Tofu and fish. Here is our school menu.
Mom: That sounds good.what would you like fordinner,Amy?
Amy: I‘d like potatoes and green beans. I‘m hungry,Mom.
Mom: Oh! Mew mew is hungry,too!
(2) zip: What‘s your favorite fruit, Monkey?
Monkey: I like apples. They are sweet.
Rabbit: I like fruit. But I don‘t like grapes. They are sour. Bananas are my favorite. They are tasty. Zip: I like carrot juice. It‘s fresh and healthy. What about you, Zoom?
Zoom: I like beef, but I‘m heavy now. I have to eat vegetables.
7. Song: What do you have for lunch?
8.Story time
Zip: What do you have fordinner today?
Zoom: I have fish, but it‘s too salty.
Zip: Well. Let‘s go to a restaurant.
Zoom: Do you have any noodles
Server: No, today is Monday. We have fish. We have noodles on TUESDAY.
Zoom: Noodles are my favorite food. Do you have any noodles today?
Server: No. we have pork and green beans. We have noodles on Wednesady.
Zoom: Do you have noodles?
Server: No. we have cabbage and mutton. We have noodles on Thuraday.
Zoom: Do you have noodles today?
Server: No. Wehave eggplant. We have noodles on Friday.
Zoom: do you have noodles?
Server: Yes, we do.
Zoom: These noodles are too salty.
Zip: Uh—oh.
Recycle One
1. Read and act
David: Can I interview you for the school newspaper?
Miss Green: Yes, certainly.
David: What do you do on Saturdays and Sundays?
Miss Green: I often read books and watch Tv./
David: What‘s your favorite food?
Miss Green: I like green beans. They are tasty and healthy.
David: Than you, Miss Green.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Miss green: You arewelcome.
(2) Dear Zhang Peng:
My name is Jack. I am 10 yeas old. I study in Willow School. My favorite dauy is Monday. We have PE and computer calss and we have potatoes for lunch,. Potatoes are my favorite teacher is Mr Li. He is our art teacher,. he is tall nad strong. He is very active. Tell me about your school, please. Your pen pal,
Jack
2. song: My favorite day
课后练习
1.选词填空
Don‘t have favorite are llike salty sweet
(1) What would you ________for breakfast?
(2) What‘s your_________food?
(3) I ____________ ice-cream.
(4) I ___________ LIKE IT.
(5) The bananas are too _________.
(6) They ________________ fresh.
2.完成下列句子
（！） Sarah likes apples. Because It‘s _____________(甜的)
（2） King doesn‘t like grapes. Because they are __________(酸的)
（3） Amy likes tofu. Because it‘s ______________(新鲜的)
（4） Mary likes fish. Because it‘s ____________(健康的)
3. 单项选择
（！） What‘s your favorite food? ______________
A my favorite food is bananas B I don‘t like grapes C I like bags
(2) Why do you like apples? __________________
A It‘s sweet B It‘s salty C it‘s sour
(3) Do you like dunplines? ______________
A Yes, I like B Yes, I am C No, I like D I don‘ t know.
(4) What do you have for lunch today?_____________
A I have a book B I have meat. C I don‘ t like it D Yes , I have
4. 连词成句
（1） salty are, the potatoes
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(2) lunnch do have what you for
(3) like I grapes
(4) is what favorite your food
(5) are the sweet apples
5. 阅读短文
Our new Chinese taecher is Miss li. She is youngand ________(漂亮的)。［www.61k.com) She is _________(严厉的) but
very
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
kind. ____________ (西红柿)_________ are her favorite food, because they are___________(健康的) . On Saturdays, she often reads _________(书)or_____________(看) TV. I like her very much.
Unit 4 what can you do?
1. Words and phreases:
cook the meal, water the flowers, sweep the floor, clean the bedroom , make the bed,
set the table, wash the clothes, do the dishes , use a computer,empty the trash , helpful, at home, ill, wash the
windows, just do it, do housework, put away the clothes, I‘d like to=I would like to, robot
have a try, can‘t =cannot, play chess
2.Sentences:
(1) what are they doing? They are doing…….
(2) what is it doing? It is doing ……
(3) what is she/he doing? She/ He is doing……
(4) Can you clean the bedroom? No, I can‘t. But the robot can.
(5) What can you do at home? I can clean the room/wash the clothes……….
3.Grammar:
(1) What 引导的特殊疑问句:a.what+be+sb doing? b. sb+is+doing sth.
4. Chant:
(1) Dog , dog, what can you do? I can hide in the shoe.
I can run after you. Mike ,Mike, what can you do?
Panda, panda, what can you do ? I can draw animal in the zoo!
I can eat so much bamboo.
Mouse, mouse ,what can you do?
(2) cook the meals. Sweep the floor.
water the plants. Empty the trash.
wash the clothes. And there is more.
No time to dance! Oh, please! no more!
Make the bed.
5.Dialogues：
(1) Teacher : Are you helpful at home, Chen jie?
Chen : sure.
Teacher : what can you do?
Chen : I can sweep the floor. I can cook the meals.
Teacher : Great! you’re helpful!
(2) Amy : Can you set the table, chen jie?
Chen : Yes, I can .I can do the dishes ,too.
Zhang : Can you wash the clothes?
John : No, I can’t ,but I’d like to have a try!
6.Phonics:
or : short fork horse storm all :tall small ball hall
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
pl :play plane plate place pr :pretty prince pride pray
7. read and write
(!) Zip: Mother Goat is ill.
Mionkey : Wecanhelp her.
Zip: What can you do?
Monkey: I cansweep the floor
Zip: I can cook the meals.
Rabbit: I can wash the windows.
Zip: What can you do, zoom?
Zoom: I can water the flowers!
Zip: OK,, just do it.
Goat: thank you. you are helpful.
(2) Zhang: Robot, can you make the bed?
Robot: No. I can‘t.
John: Robot,can you do the dishes?
Robot; Sorry , I can‘t.
Sarah:Robot,can you set the table?
Robot:No, I can‘t.
Amy: What canyou do?
Robot:I can play chess.
Chen: Great! Can you usea computer?
Robot: Yes, I can. I am a computer.
2.Song: I canhelp
3.Story time:
Snake: I‘mhungry. Mmm… her comes my tasty food. Now I can eat.
Frog: Dear snake. Wait a minute. I can do things for you.
Snake: Oh! What can you do? Csn you sing?
Frog: Yes, I can sing.
Snake: Can you dance?
Frog: Yes, I can. Let me go. Then I can dance for you.
Snake: OK! There is a lake near here. Let me see. Can you swim?
Frog: No! Don‘t throw me into the lake,please! I can‘t swim.
Snake: Ohg, you can‘t swim.
Frog: Ha! Ha! Silly snake! Now I can run away,Bye!
课后练习
1. 英汉互译
倒垃圾____________ 浇花__________ 做饭_______________
扫地_______________ claean the bedroom ____________
Wash the clothes________ at home____________ play chess___________
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2. 选择
（！） Can you do housework?__________
A Yes, I am B Yes, I can
(2) What house work can you do? _______________
A Ican wash the dishes B I can watch TV C No,I can‘t.
(3) Hel p yourself! ______________
A Thank you B I like fish C No, I don‘t like
3. 连词成句】
（！） the can I flowers water
(2) do you can dishes the
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(3) can olay I CHESS
(4) the meals Amy cook
(5) what they can do
(6) can clean the you livingroom
Unit five My new room
1. Words and phrases:
curtain, trash bin, closet, mirror, end table, bedroom kitchen bathroom living room, in, on, under, near behind, air-conditioner, third, look at, own, flat, very much, over, clothes, in front of work, tell
2.Sentences:
(1) There is a doll on the bed.
(2) There are many story books on the shelf.
(3) Is this your bedroom? Yes, it is./No , it isn‘t .
(4) I have my own room now.
(5) This is……….
(6) Where is ……….? It‘s near/on/in…………the …………
3.Grammar
(1) There be 句型: a. There is /are +n.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
4.Chant:
(1) The end tables are big,
The curtains are blue,
The garbage is empty,
The closet is full.
The mirror is terrific.
The air-conditioner is cool.
5 . Dialogues：
(1) Sarah: I have my own room now.
Chen: Really? What’s it like?
Sarah: There is a big closet, a new air-conditioner and a new mirror. There are blue curtains.
(2) A: Where is the trash bin?
B: It’s near the table.
A: Where is the closet?
B: It’s in front of the bed.
A: Where are the books?
B: They are on the desk.
A: Where are the clothes?
B: They are in the clothes.
6 . Phonics:
ir: skirt shirt girl birthday
ur: nurse purple hamburger fur
th: thin thank Thursday math this that those clothes
7.Read and write
(!) we have rabbits. We have a new flat. It‘s on the third floor. There are two bedrooms, a kitchen, a bathroom, and a livingroom. I‘m a nbayby rabbit. I have myown room now. It‘s smalland nice. Ther ia a mirror , a bed and a bigcloset. There are green curtains and two tables. There is a new air-conditioner. It‘s cool. I love my new room very much
(2)This is my room. There ia a bed,a desk,a closet and a shelf. There aretwo end tables near the bed. The computer is on the sesk. The books are on the shelf. The trash bin is behind the door. Wah tcan you see over the bed? It‘s my picture.
8. Sng: My saml bedroom
9. Story time:
It‘s a warm spring morning.
Beer can: can you help me? I want to go home.
Miss Bird: Where is your home?
Beer Can: it‘s in the recycle bin.
Miss Bird: Sorry, I have no time.
Little Beer kicks the beer can. He flies toRabbit and Monkey.
Beer Can: Can you help me find a recycle bin,please? It‘s my home.
Monkey: I have to hurry. It‘s time for school.
Rabbit: Sorry, I‘m busy, too.
A strong wind blows the beer can into the river.Hesurprises two turtles.
Turtle 1:Look! There is a beer can in front of us.
Turtle 2:Let‘s pushit to the river bank.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zip and Zoom: walking alone the river bank.
Zoom: Oh, dear! There isa beer can on the river bank. Zip: Let‘s put it into the recycle bin.
Beer Can: Thank you. I‘m home now. I‘m so happy.
课后练习
1. 用 am is are 填空
（！） This_______ my livingroom
(2) There __________ some nuts.
(3) There _________ many stories books on the table.
(4) Ther___________a mirror on the wall.
(5) There ____________a phone on the table.
2. 连线
On the bed 在墙上
On the shelf 在床头柜上
On the wall 在床上
On the end table 随便吃
Help yourself 在书架上
3. 给出划线单词的正确意义
（ ） A 卧室 B 厨房 C 卫生间
（ ） 2. The trash A 在门后 C 在门前 C 在旁边
（ ） A 两张桌子 B 两个凳子 C 两个床头柜 （ ）
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A 在床上 B 在床下面 C在桌子上
4. 连词成句
（！） I very much love room my new
(2) have I a trash bin room in my
(3) mirror walll on there the is a
(4) I now my room have own
(5) are there curtains my in bedroom
Unit six In a nature park
1. Words and phrases:
river, flower, grass, lake, forest, path, house, bridge, tree, road building, picture, sky, cloud, mountain, village, city park, farm, holiday, clean, air, run any, park nature
2. Sentences:
(1) Is there a village over there? Yes, there is/No, there isn‘t.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(2)Are there any pandas in the mountains? Yes, there are /No, there aren‘t
(3) There is /are …in…….
(4) Do you like……….?
(5) I like …………..
3.Chant:
(1) The grass is green. The wind blows.
The sky is blue. The clouds play.
The air is clean. The river flows.
The day is new. Beautiful day, beautiful day!
4.Dailogues：
(1) Zhang: There’s a nature park in the city.
John: Is there a river in the park?
Zhang: Yes, there is.
John: Is there a farm?
Zhang: No, there isn’t.
(2) Sarah: Are there any bridges in your village?
Zhang: Yes, there are
Sarah: Are there any tall buildings in your village?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zhang: No, there aren’t.
5. Phonics:
er: teacher river farmer dinner
or: doctor actor visitor author
wh; who whose whole whom why what where white
6.Chant:
Father and mother eat dinner at the river.
An actor is the visitor of a doctor.
Who‘s playing with the white whales.
7.Read and write
(!) Wu:Look! This is my holiday picture.
Sarah: Is it a nature park?
Wu: Yes, it is.
Sarah: Is there a forestin the park?
Wu: Yes, there is.
Sarah: Is there a river?
Wu: No, there isn‘t.
Sarah:Is there a lake?
Wu: Yes, there is.
Sarah:Do you like this park?
Wu:Yes. It‘s pretty.
(2)Sarah: I like my village. Ther are many rivers and bridges in the villages. The wateris claen. The air is fresh.
Chen: I like my village, too. There are many mountains near my village. There are no tall buildings . the sky is blue. The louds are white. I can run on the grass.
Sarah: Are there any pandas in the montains?
Chen: No, there aen‘t. Asre there any fish in the rivers?
Sarah: Yes, there are. You can see many fish.
7.Song: The panda
8.Story Time:
Zoom: What a nice day! Let‘s go to a nature park!
Zip: Why not? Wecan take some pictures there. Look at that beautiful bridge!
Zoom: The mountain and trees are beautiful. Too.
Zip: Look! There is a house over there!
Zoom: Are there any peoiple in that house?
Zip: Let‘s go and have a look!
Zoom: Oh, it‘s a barn. Ther is so much corn! I like corn.
Zip: Look! Thnere is a koala bear over there.
Zip: Please take a picture for us,Zoom.
Zoom: I‘m a bear, tooo. Why don‘t you take a picture of me?
Zip: Don‘t be silly, Zoom.
Momkey: You didn‘t put film in the camera!
Zoom: Oh, dear me!
Zip: Oh, my!
Recycle Two
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
1 Read
(!)Monkey : Mom isn‘t at home. I can help you,DAD.
Dad: Sure,. You are a big boy now.
Monkey: Of course!
Dad: Can you cook the meals?
Monkey: Sorry, I can‘t.
Dad: Can you wash the clothes?
Monkey: No. I can‘t.
Dad: What can you do,then?
Monkey: Mmm… I can clean the bedroom.
Dad: Ok. Empty the trash, please.
Monkey: Look! Dad! I can empty the trash! Oops!
(2) My name is Deng Ming. This is my village. It is in the montains. There are many smalles and a river.There is a bridge over the river. There are manyfish in the river. There is a road beside the river. There are many flowers near the road. There is a green grass and many trees. We can run on the grass. There is a lake near my village. The water is claen. It‘s a beautiful village.
3.Chant:
January, February, New Year‘s Day. March invites our kites to play.
April showers bring May flowers. June and july have sunny hours.
August and September , back to school.
October makes the weather cool.
November and December . winter is here.
Twelve months make a year!
4. song: We can help our planet
课后练习：
1. 连词成句
（！） there the in are tall city building
(2) see many you can fish
(3) you do like park this
(4) at that bridge look beautiful
2.按要求完成问题
This is my village. It‘s in the mountains. There are many small hiuses and a river. There is a bridge over the river. There are many flowers near the friver. That‘s beautiful.
1. Is there a bridge over the river?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2.Ar there any buildings in this villsge?
3. What is in the village?
3.按要求完成句子
（1） There is a lake in the nature park?(变成问句)
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（2） Are there any apples on the tables?(肯定、否定回答)
（3） Is there a village over there? (变成复数)
PEP 五年级下册教学内容
Unit One This is my day
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
Have English class, do morning exercises, eat breakfast, play sports, eat dinner ⅡSentences
1. When do you do morning exercises?
I do morning exercises at 8:30.
2. When do you play sports?
I play sports at 3:30.
3 .I get up at 6:30.
I go to bad at 9:00.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Amy: When do you get up?
Zhang : At 6:00. What about you?
Amy: I usually get up at 6:30. When do you eat breakfast?
Zhang: At 6:20.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Amy: When do you go to school?
Zhang: At 7:00.And you?
Amy: At 7:00, too.
ⅣPassages (Page 6) (Finish the exercises—Time Table)
ⅤPhonics: /ei/ /gr/ / gl/
1.发元音/ei/的字母组合:
a: face make cake lady ai: rain train mail
ay: say lay gay stay wait praise ey: they grey hey
ea: break great steak eigh: neighbor eight weight
2. /gr/
Great grow grass green
3 /gl/
Glad glue glass glove
Ⅵ Reading Passages
Days of the week
There are seven days in a week. They are Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. Sunday is the first day of the week. Saturday and Sunday are the weekend. Usually, we have a rest on the weekends. The other five days are weekdays. We usually go to school or work during weekends. Nobody likes Monday, because we have a good time on Sunday and we don’t want to study or work any more.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. There are seven days in a week.
( ) 2. Monday is the first day of the week
( ) 3. People usually go to work on weekdays.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. We usually go to school or work during ＿ .
A weekdays B Monday C Saturday D weekends ( ) 2. There are ＿days in a week.
A two B four
C five D one
( ) 3. Nobody likes ＿, because we have a good time on Sunday and we don’t want to study or work any more.
A Friday B Monday C Thursday D Saturday
Ⅶ Reciting passages
Weather
Sun is an old man. It’s sunny when he smiles.
Cloud is a young man. It’s cloudy when he is angry.
Wind is a little boy. It’s windy when he goes out to play.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Rain is a young lady. It’s rainy when she is sad.
Snow is an old woman. It’s snowy when combs her hair.
Unit One This is my day
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Climb mountains go shopping play the piano visit grandparents go hiking
ⅡSentences
1.What do you do on the weekends?
I often go hiking / shopping.
2. I usually play football, sometimes I visit my grandparents.
3. I usually clean my room.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Chen: What do you do on the weekends?
John: I often play football. Sometimes I go hiking .What about you?
Chen: Usually I clean my room. I often go hiking, too.
John: Let’s go hiking together next Sunday.
Chen: Great.
ⅣPassages (Page 9) (Finish the exercises)
ⅤReading Passages
A letter
September 15th, 2009
Dear Lily,
How are you! We have not seen each other for a long time. I miss you very much. Last winter vacation our vacation went to travel. We visited shanghai, Hangzhou and Hongkong. We had a good time. How about you?
Do you have any new friends in the new school? How is your study? Please write to me. Best Wishes!
Yours, Linda
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. We haven’t seen each other for three years.
( ) 2. Last summer vacation our family went to travel.
( ) 3. We had a good time in the last winter vacation.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. we＿each other for a long time.
A haven’t seen B didn’t see
C haven’t saw D aren’t see
( ) 2. I miss you＿
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A too much B very much
C how much D very many
( ) 3. We visited shanghai, Hangzhou and＿
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
A Macau B Taiwai
C Shenzhen D Hongkong
Ⅵ Exercises
Unit One This is my day
1. 在空格内填写恰当的单词
＿＿＿the floor ＿＿＿＿the tree ＿＿＿＿sports ＿＿＿＿＿ the room ＿＿＿have English ＿＿＿dinner
2. 补全对话
Linda: ＿＿＿＿is your favorite season?
Sun; ＿＿＿＿＿is summer.
Linda: Why do ＿＿＿like summer?
Sun: Because I can swim in summer. ＿＿＿＿＿season do you like?
Linda: Winter.
Sun: ＿＿do you like winter?
Linda: Because I can ＿＿＿＿a snow man in winter.
Sun: It’ s time to class. I have to go. Bye bye!
Linda: See you!
3. 选择
（1） Sophia : ＿＿＿＿＿?
Linda: I often get up at 7:00.
A When do you go to school? B When do you have breakfast?
C When do you get up?
(2) Mike: What do you usually do on you weekends?
Sun: ＿＿＿＿＿
A I’m a boy B I’m a teacher C I often play computer game
(3) Will: Do you get up at 7:00?
Mike: ＿＿＿＿＿
A No, I don’t B Yes, I am C No, I do
(4) Helen: When ＿＿ you eat your dinner?
Sophia: At 20:00
A do B does C is
4. 按要求完成下列各题
（1）对画线部分提问)
（2） Sophia gets up at 6:30.(变成一般疑问句)
（3） We often climb Xishan mountains on the weekends.( 对画线部分提问)
（4） Sun usually goes to school at 7:30.( 对画线部分提问)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（5） Do you eat breakfast at 7:00?(否定回答)
5.连词成句
（1）often up I get 6:30 at
(2) what you do usually do weekends on ?
(3) go to bed when do you ?
(4)Let’s go together hiking.
6.根据提示完成下列句子
（1）周末，我们一起去看爷爷奶奶吧？
Let’s＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿weekends.
(2) 我们每天都上英语课？
We have＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿every day.
(3) 有时，我早上跑步
Some times, I ＿＿＿＿＿ in the morning.
(4) 你应该每天都打扫房屋。［www.61k.com)
You should ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿every day.
(5) 你们周末去野炊吗？
＿＿＿＿＿you have ＿＿＿＿＿ on the weekends?
Unit Two My favorite season
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
Spring summer fall winter windy and warm sunny and hot cool ⅡSentences
1. What’s your favorite season, Chenjie?
Winter
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Zhang: Which season do you like best?
Mike: Fall. It’s always sunny and cool. Which season do you like best?
Zhang: Winter. I can play with snow.
Mike: I don’t like winter. It’s too cold.
ⅣPassages (Page 18) (answer the questions)
ⅤPhonics: /ε / /sp/ /sk/
1./ ε /
Air: hair chair stair
cold
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Ear: bear wear swear pear
2 ./sp/ speak speed spell splash
3./sk/ ski sky skate skirt
Ⅵ.Reciting Passages
1. Spring is green with flowers and songs , summer is hot and the days are long.
Fall is golden and farmers are busy, winter is white and the year is gone.
2. On Weekends
There are a lot of weekends in a year. People like to take part in many activities on weekends. In spring, children like to visit the flowers booming on weekends. Children like to go hiking. In summer, People like to go camping on weekends. Children like to go swimming.
In fall, some children like to go bird- watching, some like to fly kites.
In winter, children like to go skating and skiing, some like to make a snow man on weekends. Do you like weekends? What do you do on your weekends?
Notes: hike: 长途徒步旅行
Ⅶ Reading Passages
Seasons
There are four seasons in a year, spring, summer, fall, winter. Spring is green, because trees and grass begin to grow. Summer is red, because the sun keeps burning in the sky and people feel hot. Fall is yellow, because the crops mature and leaves turn yellow. Winter is white, because it snows and snow is white.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. There are six seasons in a year.
( ) 2. Spring is very hot..
( ) 3. The sun keeps burning in the sky in summer.
ⅡAnswer the questions above the passages
1. How many seasons in a year? What are they?
2. Which season is cold?
3. Which season makes the crops mature?
Unit Two My favorite season
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Swim fly kites skate make a snowman plant trees
ⅡSentences
1. Which season do you like best?
Winter, I can make a snowman.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
2. What would you like to do?
I’d like to……….
3. A: What’s your favorite season?
B: Summer.
A: Why?
B: I can make a swim in summer.
Ⅲ.Useful Languages
1. When is the best time to go to Beijing? Fall
2. What’s the weather like un Beijing in fall?
3. What can I do?
4. What season is it in March in Beijing?
ⅣDialogues
Chen: What’s your favorite season, Sarah?
Sarah: Spring?
Chen: Why do you like spring?
Sarah: Because I can plant tree . Which season do you like best?
Chen; Winter.
Sarah: Why do you like winter?
Chen: Because I can skate.
ⅤPassages (Page 21) (answer the questions)
Ⅵ.Grammar （见附页）
1. 情态动词can 的用法
2. Wh-引导的特殊疑问句
Ⅵ Reading Passages
My weekends
My name is Sophia. Today I want to tell you what I usually do at weekends.
At weekends, I often get up at 7:00 and I have my breakfast at 7:30. I usually have sports in the morning. I play basketball or ping-pong. At noon, I go back home for lunch. My mother always cooks delicious food for me. Then in the afternoon, I do my homework. English is my favorite subject. In the evening, I often watch TV with my parents. At 9:00, I go to bed.
This is my weekends. What about you?
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. I often get up at 7:30.
( ) 2. I usually have sports in the afternoon.
( ) 3.Maths is my favorite subject.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. I ＿my breakfast at 7:30.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A eat B have C eats D has
( ) 2. In the afternoon, I＿
A watched TV B have sports
C sleep D do my homework
( ) 3. I often ＿ with my parents.
A have breakfast B do my homework C watch TV D have sports
Ⅷ Exercises
1.填入空缺的字母
s＿＿ing(春天) ＿＿＿＿now(雪) ＿＿inter(冬天) s ＿＿im(游泳) lea＿＿＿(树叶) f ＿＿ll(秋天) su＿＿＿er( 夏天)
1. 填上恰当的动词
＿＿＿＿ a snowman ＿＿＿＿＿ the kites ＿＿＿＿＿trees
＿＿＿＿＿a picture ＿＿＿＿＿swimming ＿＿＿＿＿fruit
2. 选词填空
Spring summer fall winter
(1) ＿＿＿＿is white. And the weather is cold, we can make a snowman, and we can go skate, too.
We all like it.
(2) ＿＿＿is green. The grass are grow. The weather is sunny. We can plant trees and fly kites.
(3) The most beautiful season in a year is ＿＿＿＿. The sky is blue. The leaves are colorful.
(4) Do you like ＿＿＿? I like to swim in the sea and eat ice-cream. I like to wear my dress. 3. 选择
（1） Linda: Why do you like spring ?
Cathy: ＿＿＿＿＿
A I can swim B Because I can plant trees
C I can skate
(2) Jimmy: Do you like summer?
Tom: ＿＿＿＿＿
A Yes, I do not B No, I do not C No, I do
(3) Cathy : ＿＿＿your favorite season?
Lydia: Fall
A what B Which C What’s
(4) Sophia; What’s weather like in spring in Kunming?
Cathy: ＿＿＿＿＿
A it’s hot B It’s warm C It’s rainy
5.根据要求完成下列句子
（1）就画线部分提问)
（2） I can swim in winter.(变成一般疑问句)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（3） The weather is cool in fall in Kunming.(就画线部分提问)
（4） 就画线部分提问)
（5） Jimmy likes winter best. 变成否定句）
4. 连词成句
（1） what season your favorite is ?
(2) Spring I don’t like
(3)we because can make a snowman
(4)you like why do spring ?
(5) best I like winter
5. 根据提示完成句子
（1） 你最喜欢哪个季节？
Which ＿＿＿＿＿do you like?
（2） Sophia为什么喜欢冬天？
＿＿＿＿＿does Sophia like?
（3） 因为我可以放风筝。［www.61k.com]
＿＿＿＿＿I can fly ＿＿＿＿＿
（4） Cathy 喜欢在冬天堆雪人。
Cathy likes to ＿＿＿＿＿in winter.
Unit Three My Birthday
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
January February March April May June July August September October November December Tree-planting Day New Years Day Children’s Day Army’s Day National Day Christmas Day Birthday
ⅡSentences
1. When is your birthday?
My birthday is in June.
2. How many birthdays are there in January?
There are……..
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Mike: When is your birthday?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Amy: My birthday is in February. Is your birthday in February, too?
Mike: No, my birthday is in December. What about you, Zhang Peng?
Zhang: My birthday is in October.
ⅣPassages (Page 30) (answer the questions)
ⅤGrammar（见附页）
1. 介词的in的用法
2. when的用法
ⅤPhonics: /I / / tf/ /f/
1. / i /
eer: deer peer ere: atmosphere preservative
ear: appear dear near ier: fierce pierce
2. /tf/
Ch: cheap chip chair cheat cheek
3. /f/
sh: sheep shop ship shoulder
Ⅵ Reading Passages
My Dream
One day, I dreamed I was in a beautiful world. Grass and trees were green, flowers were blooming, fish were swimming in the clean river, some birds were flying and playing in the sky. Oh! How beautiful the world was! But in the real world, it is not so beautiful. I feel very sad.
So, I will make my dream come true. I will be an environmental protection worker. I will make the water clean. So I can swim in it with my parents and my friends. I will make the desert were green clothes. I will make the sky blue. I will also make the flowers bloom well.
In our own life, we must try our best to protect the nature. So we can enjoy the beautiful world again.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. I am in a beautiful world now.
( ) 2. Fish were swimming in the dirty river in the dream.
( ) 3.Some birds were flying and playing in the sky.
Ⅱ Answer the questions above the passages
1. What did I dreamed?
2. Is the real world beautiful?
3. What do I want to be?
Ⅶ Reciting Passage
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
When I grow up
When I grow up. What should I be?
I could be an astronaut.
And fly my rocket to the moon.
Mars might be my favorite spot.
I hope that I will grow up soon!
So many things that I could do!
I don’t know what I’d rather be.
But one thing that I know is true:
When I grow up, I will be me.
Notes: astronaut: 宇宙航行员 Rocket: 火箭 Mars: 火星
Unit Three My Birthday
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Fist second third fourth fifth eighth ninth twelfth twentieth ⅡSentences
1. When is Teacher’s Day?
It’s September 10th.
Ⅲ. .Dialogues
1. A: When ids your birthday?
B: It’s October 1st, our National Day. When is your Independence Day? A: It’s July 10th.
2. Sarah: Who has a birthday in October?
Zhang: Me.
Sarah; What is the date?
Zhang: It’s October 1st. What about you?
Sarah: My birthday is March 12th.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
ⅣPassages (Page 33) (answer the questions)
ⅤGrammar
1. 基数词变为虚数词口诀
1.2.3特殊记，加th 从4起（first, second, third, fourth）
8少t, 9去e ,千万别忘记。（www.61k.com]（eighth, ninth）
逢5及12, ve变f ( fifth, twelfth)
20到90，y要变ie. (twentieth, thirtieth, fortieth, fiftieth, sixtieth, seventieth, eightieth, ninetieth) 若是几十几，前基后序别倒位（twenty-first）
Ⅵ Reading passages
Protect yourself
Nowadays, there are many bad guys. So primary students should to protect yourselves.
Remember your home telephone number or your parents’ phone numbers and your home address.
Had better not to go out alone to new places.
Never tell the strangers your personal information. Such as your home address, your school, your parents’ telephone numbers.
If you have any problems, ask the policeman for help.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. Remember your home telephone number.
( ) 2. Not go out to new places.
( ) 3. You can tell the stranger your school.
( ) 4. If you have any problems, ask policeman for help.
ⅡAnswer the questions above the passages
1. Why do primary students should to protect themselves?
2. Can you go out alone to new places?
3. Why can’t you tell the strangers your personal information?
4. If you have any problems, who can help you?
Ⅶ Exercises
Unit Three My Birthday
1. 选词填空
In, too, when, is, for , about, much, what, many, whose
(1) ＿is my birthday.
(2) How＿is it?
(3) ＿are you doing?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(4) Her birthday is in＿
(5) I an making a birthday chart ＿our family.
(6) My birthday is May, ＿.
2. 写出下列各词的简写形式
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（1） seventh ＿ (2) first ＿ (3) second ＿
(4) fifth ＿ (5) twelfth ＿ (6)third ＿
(7) twentieth ＿ (8) sixth ＿ (9) January＿
(10) March＿ (11) April＿ (12) November＿
(13) September＿ (14) October (15)December＿
3. 补全对话
Sam: What＿ are you doing?
John: I am making＿ birthday card.
Sam: ＿ has a birthday in this month?
John: My grandpa.
Sam: What’s the ＿?
John: June 9th. And my grandpa’s birthday is June ＿ (六月二十二号) ＿ your birthday, Sam?
Sam: My ＿ is in October.
4.填入空缺的字母
Fe＿buary Jan＿ary Dece＿ber Aug＿ust A＿pril No＿ ember Ma＿ Ju＿ne Jul＿
5. 单选
（ ）1. King: Is your birthday in February too?
Summer; ＿
A Yes, it is B No , it is
C Yes, it isn’t D No, I’m not
( ) 2. Water: When is your birthday?
Sophia: My birthday ＿ December.
A Which in B When on
C When in D Which on
( ) 3. Sun: ＿
Linda: I am doing my home work.
A What about you? B What are you doing?
C What did you do? D Are you doing you homework? （ ）4. Sophia: What day is it today?
King: ＿＿
A July 20th B Birthday C Sunday D Army Day
( ) 5. Cindy: What date is it today?
Water: ＿＿
A Tuesday B It’s April C It’s Dec. 1st
6. 连词成句
(1) March is whose in birthday ?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(2) ? is birthday in her July
(3) good idea I have a
（4）what date today is the ?
(5) is your birthday when mother ?
7.按要求完成各题
(1）对画线部分提问)
（2）Dose your birthday in March?(否定回答)
（3）th对画线部分提问)
（4）对画线部分提问)
(5) I’m 对画线部分提问)
8. 找出正确的译文
（ ）1. Let’s make a birthday card. A 今天几号？
（ ）2. It’s October 1st, our National Day. B 我的生日在十二月份
（ ）3.What is the date? C 她不会看到卡片的
（ ）4. My birthday is in December. D 今天是十月一日，我们的国庆节 （ ）5.She won’t be see the card. E 让我们来做生日贺卡吧
Unit Four What are you doing?
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
Drawing pictures doing the dishes cooking dinner reading a book
answering the phone
ⅡSentences
1. What are you doing?
I’m doing the dishes/ drawing pictures/ reading a book.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Amy: Hello.
Chen: Hi, Amy. It’s Chen Jie.
Amy: Hi, Chen Jie. What are you doing?
Chen: I an drawing pictures. What are you doing?
Amy: I am reading a book.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
ⅣPassages (Page 48) (answer the questions)
ⅤGrammar
1.现在进行时
Ⅵ.Phonics /u:/ /tr/ /tw/
1. /u:/
oo: boot cook pool zoo tooth ue: blue clue cruel
ou: group youth soup wound ew: drew flew jewel
ui: suit fruit juice
2. /tr/
Train tree try track
3. /tw/
Twin twice twelve twenty
Ⅷ Reciting Passages
Mother’s Day
Mother’s Day is coming. Mother’s Day is on the second Sunday in May. We have many things to do on Mother’s Day.
Buy Mum a beautiful red carnation.
Give Mum a big hug and kiss and tell her you love her.
Give Mum a beautiful card with words like “ I love you, Mummy” or “ Happy Mother’s Day” on it.
Notes: carnation: 康乃馨
Ⅷ Reading Passages
Do you know when to use these numbers?
There are some public numbers. Do you know when to use these numbers?
110 is a number for calling policeman when you have met some illegal things.
119 is a number using for a fire accident.
120 is number for asking medical help when somebody is serious ill or hurt.
Please do not dial these numbers for fun. It is forbidden.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. When you meet some thieves, you can call 110.
( ) 2. somebody is serious ill, you can call 119.
( ) 3. There is a fire accident in your building. So you can call 119.
( ) 4. A girl was hurt by a car, you can dial 120.
ⅡMatch game
Doctor 119
Policeman 120
Fireman 110
Unit Four What are you doing?
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Listing to music washing clothes cleaning the room writing a letter writing an e-mail
ⅡSentences
1. What is your father doing?
He is writing an e- mail.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Chen: Hello.
Women: Hello. This is Nina. Can I speak to Mun, please?
Chen: She is cooking dinner. Please hold on.
Women: Thank you.
Chen: Mom, there is acall for you.
Mom: Thank you.
ⅣPassages (Page 51) (Finish the sentences)
Ⅴ Reading Passages
My Favorite sport
My favorite sport is swimming. I often swim in the pool. I swim twice a week. When I am swimming in the pool, I am very happy. I look like a lovely fish in the pool. I enjoy swimming, Because swimming can make me strong and healthy. I t can also bring me a lot of happiness. Of course, I like watching this sport. I hope I will become a swimmer in the future.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. Swimming my favorite sport.
( ) 2. I swim once a week.
( ) 3.Because swimming can make me strong and healthy.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. I often swim in the ＿
A pond B river C sea D pool
( ) 2. I swim twice a ＿
A week B day
C season D month
( ) 3. I look like ＿ in the pool when I am swimming.
A duck B fish C snake D frog
Ⅵ Exercises
1. 写出下列各词的现在分词
make＿ talk＿ take＿ listen ＿
play＿ cook＿ go＿ read＿
answer＿ draw＿ watch＿
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
3. 选词填空
On later can a what the she this
(1) ＿ are you doing?
(2) I am answering the phone.
(3) See you ＿
(4) What is ＿ doing?
(5) I am reading ＿ book.
(6) Hold ＿ ,please.
(7) ＿ I speak to your mother, please?
4. 单选
(1) Lydia: What is your father doing?
Tom: ＿
A She is writing an e-mail B He is a policeman
C She is watching D He is writing a letter
(2) Cathy: How are you?
Louis: ＿
A I’m very well, thank you B And you
C You are welcome D How about you
(3) Linda: Is your father cleaning the room?
Lydia: ＿
A No, he is B Yes, he is
C No, she is D Yes, he is not
(4) Jim: There is a call for you.
Tom: ＿
A Hold on, please B Thank you
C Sure D What are you doing?
(5) Cathy: Good night!
Tom: ＿
A Goodbye B See you later
C Sleep well D How are you?
(6) Sophia: What are you doing?
Sun: ＿
A I am read a book. B I drawing pictures
C He is doing an experiment D I am reading a book
5.连词成句
（1）？ Is your father doing
(2) again see you !
(3) am doing I my homework
（4）call is there a you for
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(5) listing to are you music ?
6.按要求完成下列各题
（1） Linda is reading a book.(对画线部分提问)
（2）Is Sun doing his homework? (肯定回答)
（3）She is listing to music?( 对画线部分提问)
(4) Is King handsome? (否定/肯定回答)
（5）He is dating. (变成一般疑问句)
7. 按提示完成下列各题
（1）Sun 正在听音乐。［www.61k.com)
He ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿music.
（2）Linda 在做什么呢？
＿＿＿＿＿Linda ＿＿＿＿＿?
(3) Cathy 正在接电话吗？
＿＿＿＿＿Cathy＿＿＿＿＿＿＿the phone?
(4) Lydia 正在打扫房间。
Lydia ＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿.
Unit Five Look at the Monkey
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
Flying walking running jumping swimming
ⅡSentences
Look at the tiger. It’s running, and the rabbit is jumping. Ⅲ.Dialogues
Chen: I se the mother elephant.
Amy: What is she doing?
Chen; She is walking.
Amy: What about the baby elephant? What is it doing? Chen: It is running.
ⅣPassages (Page 60) (Finish the exercises)
ⅤGrammar 时态-现在进行时
1.构成 主语+be+动词原型
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（1）肯定句： 主语+be(am, is ,are)+动词-ing+其他
eg: I am doing my homework.
(2)否定句：主语+be (am, is, are)+not+动词—ing+其他
eg: He is not cleaning the room.
(3)一般疑问句： Be(am, is,are)+主语+动词-ing+其他？
回答： Yes, 主语+be(am, is, are)
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
No, 主语+ be(am, is, are)+not
eg: Are they playing chess?
Yes, they are./ No, they aren’t.
(4)特殊疑问句： 特殊疑问词+be(am,is,are)+主语+动词-ing+其他？
eg: What is she doing? She is doing her homework.
2.动词变成现在分词的规则
（1）直接在词尾加-ing. Eg: read-reading listen-listening
(2) 以不发音字母e结尾的动词，去e加-ing. Eg: skate-skating make-making close-closing
(3) 重读闭音节词尾，词尾只有一个辅音字母，应该双写该辅音字母再加-ing.
Eg: begin-beginning run-running swim-swimming cut-cutting
3.基本用法
（1）表说话时动作正在发生或进行。（www.61k.com) Eg: They are listing to the teacher.
(2) 表现阶段或不限说话时特定时间范围内进行的动作。
Eg: They are working hard at their lessons this year.
(3) 表计划或安排将要进行的动作。常用动词：go, come, arrive, leave, start, stay.
Eg: Will is leaving ffor Kunming tomorrow.
(4) 现在进行时和always, constantly, continually等副词连用表示反复出现的问题，常带有一种不
赞赏，不满等感情色彩。
Eg: He is always late. She is constantly telling lies.
(5) 有些动词如：know, lie, stand, have, own, belong to, like, love, hope, want等，通常不用于进行
时。
Eg: My hometown lies in the east of Kunming.
The books belongs to Sun.
Exercises:
1. 根据汉语完成句子
（1）Helen is (打扫) the house.
(2) I am 看书)a book about the music.
(3)Look! She is (唱歌)in the river.
(4)Listen! Some one is 敲门) at the door.
(5)My little sister is 玩玩具) with the toy.
2.句型转换
（1）I am going to school.(对画线部分提问)
（2）They are having a picnic.(改为否定句)
（3）My mom is cooking,(对画线部分提问)
(4) Jim plays football everyday.(用now改写句子)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
2. 改写句子
（1）-----What your sister doing?
------He his homework now.
A is, is doing B is, dose C are, writes D are, is doing
(2) Look! He is fast.
A run B running C running D to running
now.
A one’s homework B her homeworks C she homework D her homework
(4) The students are A listen B listen to C listening D listening to
(5) Don’t make a noise. Daddy A sleeps B to sleep C is sleeping D sleep
Ⅵ.Phonics /a:/
ar: park start yard ear: heart warm au: aunt laugh
a : fast task waster plant er ; clerk al: half behalf calf
af: after shaft craft
Ⅶ Reciting passages
Mother’s love
Mother ‘s love is the umbrella on rainy days. Under the umbrella my face won’t get wet.
Mother’s love is the string of the kite.
At the end of the earth it always holds my heart..
Mother’s love is rhyme in my childhood.
In the depths of my memory it will never get old.
Notes: wet :湿的 string: 绳子 rhyme : 押韵的诗
Ⅷ Reading Passages
April- fool Day
Notes : forgive : 可原谅的 unfortunately不幸地 laughing stock: 笑料
April 1st is Foolish Day. On this day, people always make fun of each other. If you are the laughing stock, you can not be angry. Because today every jokes should be forgiven. . On this day, you should be very careful, or you will be fooled. If you are unfortunately fooled, you will be called “ April Fool”. Now Foolish Day is not popular in western countries but also in China.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. April 1st is April Fool Day.
( ) 2. people do not always make fun of each other on this day.
( ) 3. On the day, it is to be fooled.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. On April Fool Day people always make＿of each other.
A happy B fun
C jokes D glad
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
( ) 2. If you are the laughing stock, you＿ angry.
A will be B can be
C won’t be D can’t be
( ) 3. On April -fool Day＿should be forgiven.
A everything B everybody
C anything D every jokes
Unit Five Look at the Monkey
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Sleeping climbing fighting swimming drinking water
ⅡSentences
What are the elephants doing? They are drinking water. Ⅲ.Dialogues
Wu: What do you see?
John: I see two elephants.
Wu: What are they doing?
John: They are drinking water.
Wu: Can you see the monkeys?
John: Yea , they are swinging.
ⅣPassages (Page 63) (Answer the questions)
ⅤGrammar
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
1. 现在进行时
Ⅵ Reading Passages
Universe
Notes: universe: 宇宙 spaceship：太空船 satellite:卫星
When we talk about universe, we mean the earth, the sun, the moon and the stars, and the space between them. Many of the stars can’t be seen because they are too far.The moon travel around the earth. It is only 380,000 kilometres away. People have been to the moon. Many countries have set up man-made states. So that the world is becoming a smaller place and people in the world know each other better.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. Many of the stars can’t be seen because they are near.
( ) 2. The moon travels around the earth.
( ) 3. People have never been to the moon.
ⅡAnswer the questions above the passages
1. What is the universe?
2. Why can’t we see all the stars in the universe?
3. How far from the moon to the earth?
Ⅶ Exercises
Unit five Look at the Monkeys
1.写出下列各词的现在分词
walk＿ swim＿ drink＿ run＿
climb＿ jump＿ swing＿ fly ＿
2.写出下列各词的复数形式
Man＿ you＿ this＿ it ＿
tiger＿ monkey＿ banana＿ baby＿
lion＿ I ＿ giraffe＿ rabbit＿
3. 填写恰当的动词
＿ the tree ＿ in the sea ＿ fast
＿ water ＿ in the sky ＿ slowly
4.填入空缺的字母
swi＿(游泳) fl＿ （飞） sl＿ e ＿ （睡觉）
r＿ n (跑) ＿ wi ＿g (荡) ＿ ＿ imb (往上爬)
＿ I ＿ h t（打架）
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5. 选词填空
Can can’t
(1) Duck’s ＿ fly.
(2) Birds ＿ fly.
(3) Pandas＿ climb trees.
(4) I ＿ eat the stones.
(5) Kangaroos ＿ jumps.
(6) Cats ＿ catch rats(老鼠)
6. 单选
(1) Sophia: Can the tigers swim?
Tom: ＿＿＿＿＿
A It can not B Yes, they can C Yes, it can
(2) Sun: What are the monkeys doing?
Cathy; ＿＿＿＿＿
A It is swimming B It is sleeping C They are swinging
(3) Jacky: Are the birds flying?
Water: ＿＿＿＿＿
A No, it is not B Yes , it is C Yes, they are
(4) King: What do you see?
Cindy: ＿＿＿＿＿
A I see two rabbits B Sorry, I can not C Yes, it is
7. 按要求完成各题
（1）The panda is sleeping. (对画线部分提问)
（2）Can the fish climb trees? (肯定回答)
（3）Sun is singing. (变成否定句)
（4）Cathy is flying in the sky?(变成一般疑问句)
（5）Tom is drinking water.( (对画线部分提问)
8.连词成句
（1） Lydia jumping is
(2) what doing they are ?
(3) you see the can dinosaur
(4) Tom is doing what ?
(5) They are water drinking
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
9.根据提示完成句子
（1） 大象在跑步
The elephants ＿＿＿＿＿ (jog)
(2) 小鸟们在干什么？
＿＿＿＿＿birds＿＿＿＿＿?
(3) 鸭子会飞吗？
＿＿＿＿＿duck＿＿＿＿＿？
（4） 你看见蛇了吗？
＿＿＿＿＿you see ＿＿＿＿＿?
Unit Six A field trip
Section A
ⅠWords and phrases
Catching butterflies picking up leaves taking pictures watching insects doing an experiment ⅡSentences
1. What is Mike doing? He is watching insects
2. What is he doing? He is eating lunch. / he is doing an experiment.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Teacher: What are you doing?
John: I am watching my classmates.
Teacher: Where are they?
John: They are in the woods.
Teacher: Are they catching butterflies?
John: No, they aren’t. They are picking up leaves.
ⅣPassages (Page 72) (Finish the exercises)
ⅤGrammar
1.现在进行时
Ⅵ.Phonics /ai/
Y: cry try sky style I 在开音节中： bike write time price quite
Ie; tie die pie ui: disguise guide
Ei: either neither igh: light high might night bright right
Ⅶ Reciting Passages
Christmas
Christmas is on December 25th. We decorate our Christmas tree with balls and lights. Then we put a star on top. We put our presents under the tree. We send Christmas cards and sing Christmas carols at school. We wait for Santa Claus to bring us presents.
For Christmas dinner we eat turkey and Christmas cake. Christmas is my favorite time of a year. Notes: decorate: 装饰 carol: 颂歌 Turkey: 火鸡
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Ⅷ Reading Passages
Guangzhou
Guangzhou is the capital of Guangdong. It is the centre of Guangdong province. If you come to Guangzhou, you will see many high buildings, wide roads and beautiful gardens. Guangzhou has taken on a new look.
There are many people too. Because Guangzhou has nearly 10,00,000 people.
ⅠRead the following sentences and choose “T” for True and “F” for False.
( ) 1. Guangzhou is the capital of Guangdong.
( ) 2. Guangdong is the centre of Guangzhou.
( ) 3. Guangzhou is a province.
( ) 4. Guangzhou is beautiful.
ⅡChoose the best answer ,A, B, C or D, to these questions.
( ) 1. Guangzhou is the ＿of Guangdong province.
A city B capital C centre D B and C
( ) 2. You can ＿many high buildings in Guangzhou.
A look B meet
C see D find
( ) 3. Guangzhou has＿roads and beautiful gardens.
A big B wide C long D small
Unit Six A field trip
Section B
ⅠWords and phrases
Having a picnic counting insects writing a report collecting leaves playing chess
ⅡSentences
What is John dong? He is playing chess.
Ⅲ.Dialogues
Teacher: Where is Zhang Peng?
Wu: He is in the wood.
Teacher: Is he taking pictures?
Wu: No,, he isn’t. He is playing chess.
Teacher; Is John playing chess, too?
Wu: Yes, he is. They are playing together.
ⅣPassages (Page 75) (Finish the exercises)
Ⅵ Reading passages
Mid-autumn Festival
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
The Mid-Autumn Festival is an old festival in China, Everyone likes it because family members get together at home that day.
At supper time people sit around the table, eat mooncakes and enjoy the big and round moon in the sky.
Answer the questions above the passages
1 What is the Mid- autumn Festival?
2 Why dose everyone like the Mid-autumn Festival?
3 What kind of food do the people usually eat on that day?
Ⅶ Exercises
Unit six A field trip
1.写出下列各词的复数形式
Ant ＿ tree＿ leaf＿ wolf ＿ shelf ＿ butterfly＿
insect＿ classmate＿
2. 选词填空
To, big , are, is, an, where, like
(1) He is doing ＿experiment.
(2) ＿ are they?
(3) ＿ they catching butterflies?
(4) I ＿ sweets.
(5) What do ants like＿eat?
(6) ＿ he watching ants?
(7) Mike is under a ＿ tree.
3. 在横线上填上恰当的动词
＿＿ picture ＿＿ an experiment ＿＿ insects
＿＿ butterflies ＿＿ up leaves ＿＿ a picnic
＿＿ chess ＿＿ a report
4. 写出下列各词的现在分词
Eat ＿＿ count ＿＿ catch＿＿
Pick ＿＿ have ＿＿ collect＿＿
5.按要求写出下列各词
Aren’t (完全形式) ＿＿ we (宾格) ＿＿ I am (缩写) ＿＿
Picture( 复数形式) ＿＿ don’t(完全形式) ＿＿ right(反义词) ＿＿
6.单选
（ ）(1)Tom: Is Cathy playing chess?
Linda: ＿＿
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A Yes, she is B No, he isn’t
C Yes, he is D No, she is
( ) (2) Sun: where is Jacky?
Cathy: ＿＿
A He is in the woods B She is in the woods
C He is a student D He is doing his homework
( ) (3) Sophia: Are they flying kites?
Apple: ＿＿
A Yes, they aren’t B No, they are
C No, they aren’t D Ok!
( ) (4) Jack: ＿＿
Cathy: He is counting insects.
A What are you doing? B What is Tom doing?
C What are they doing? D What is Linda doing?
7. 按要求完成下列各题
(1) 对画线部分提问)
(2) 对画线部分提问)
(3) Sun is catching butterflies.( 变为否定句)
(4) Are they swimming?(做否定回答)
(5) 对画线部分提问)
8. 连词成句
(1)up picking they are leaves
(2) she counting is insects
(3)taking they are pictures
(4) the boys woods are in
(5) where girls are the doing ?
9. 根据提示完成句子
（1） 他们正在野餐。［www.61k.com]
They＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿＿
(2) 蚂蚁正在吃蜂蜜吗？
＿＿＿＿＿the ants ＿＿＿＿＿?
(3) 女孩们正在下棋吗？
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
＿＿＿＿＿ the girls ＿＿＿＿＿?
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(4)Jacky 正在写报告。［www.61k.com]
Jacky is ＿＿＿＿＿
(6) Cathy 正在捉蝴蝶吗？
＿＿＿＿＿ Cathy ＿＿＿＿＿?
PEP六年级上册教学计划
Unit One How do you go there?(Section A)
1. Words and phrases
on foot, by bike, by bus, by train, by subway, by ship, by plane
2. Sentences
How do you go to school? I go to school by bike.
How do you go to Canada? I go by plane.
3. Dialogues
LIiu: How do you go to school,Sarah?
Sarah: My home is near. Usually I go to school on foot. Sometimes I go by bike. What
about you?
Liu: I usually go to school by bus.
Unit One How do you go there?(Section B)
1. Words and phrases
traffic lights, traffic rules
2. Sentences
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Stop at red light. Wait at a yellow light. Go at a green light.
3. Dialogues
Jim: How can I get to Zhongshan Park?
Chen: You can go by the No.15bus.
Jim: Can I go on foot?
Chen: Sure, if you like. It’s not far.`
4. Pronunciation
/i :/ peak beat team deal tea beach
/i/ pig big tin dish pink
Exercises
1. Fill the blanks
f＿＿t（脚） b＿k＿（自行车） b＿s（公共汽车）
tr＿＿n(火车) p＿an＿（飞机） sh＿p（轮船） tra＿＿ic（交通）
2. Match
( )1. go to school A 步行
( )2.on foot B 邮局
( )3. by subway C 公共汽车站
( )4. this afternoon D 去上学
( )5. the bus stop E 乘地铁
( )6. the post office F 今天下午
3. Translation
（1） 交通灯 （2）.到达
（3）.下午2点 （4）.stop at a red light
（5.）Traffic rules （6）. 我步行去上学
（7）让我想想
（8）你怎么到自然公园
（9）请记住交通规则
4.Fill in the blanks
(1) Usually I go to school ＿foot.
(2)Look ＿the traffic lights.
(3) In China, drivers drive ＿the right side of the road.
(4) Stop ＿at a red light,
(5) You can go there ＿bus.
(6) The traffic lights are the same＿ every country.
5. Make sentences
(1) do, you, how, to, go school ?
(2) to, we, go, park, bus, by
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(3) green, Go, light, means
(4)too, it, is, expensive
(5) this, Let’s, afternoon, to, go, office, post, the
(6) can, to, zoo, I, how, get,the
(7) to, by, school, go, I , bike
(8) there, many, are, to ,go there, ways
Unit Two Where is the science museum?(Section A) 1. Words and phrases
post office, hospital, cinema, bookstore, science museum
2. Sentences
Excuse me. Where is the library? It‘s near the post office.
3. Dialogues
Liu: Excuse me, is there a cinema near here?
Policeman: Yes, there is.
Liu: Where is the cinema, please?
Policeman: It’s next to the hospital.
Liu: Is it far from here?
Policeman: No, it‘s not far.
Liu: Thank you.
Policeman: You are welcome.
Unit Two Where is the science museum?(Section B)
1. words and phrases
turn left, turn right, go straight, west, east, north, south
2. Sentences
How can I get to the museum? Go straight for five minutes. Then turn left.
3. Dialogues
Amy: Excuse me. Where is the post office?
Wu: It‘s east of the cinema.
Amy: And then?
Wu: Turn left at the cinema, then go straight. It’s on the left.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Amy: Thank you.
4. Phonics
/e/ kettle get fetch very seven zest
/ ?/ cat gas van Sam as
Exercises
1. Fill in the blanks
（图书馆） ffice （邮局） tal （医院）
（电影院） （书店）
2. Put the sentences in order
( ) Yes, there is.
( ) No, it‘s not far.
( ) You are welcome.
( ) Is it far from here?
( ) Excuse me, is there a cinema near here?
( ) Thank you.
3. Choose the answers
A You are welcome.
B It’s next to the hospital.
C What are you going to do?
D How can I get to the hospital?
A: after school?
B:I want to buy some books, where is the bookstore?
A: You can go by the NO 12 bus. Get off at the supermarket. Then walk straight, The hospital is on the right.
B: Thank you.
4. Write the opposite words
5. Match
1. Is it far from here? A Thank you.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
2. Is there a cinema near here? B It‘s in front of the park.
3. Happy birthday to you! C No, it‘s not far.
4. Where is the museum? D She is 13.
5. How old is Amy? E Yes, there is.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
1. In the middle A 与医院相邻
2. on the right B 在……前面
3. next to the hospital C 到达
4. in front of D 笔直走
5. get to E 左转
6. a dinosaur show F 在中间
7. turn left G 一次恐龙展
8. go straight H 在右边
6.Make sentences
(1) get, museum, how, to ,the, can?
(2)west, for, minutes, three, walk.
(3)sure, I, not, am.
(4) far, is, here, from, it?
(5) No1, take, the, bus
Unit Three What are you going to do?( Section A)
1. Words and phrases
take a trip, read a magazine, go to the cinema, tomorrow, tonight, this morning, this afternoon, this evening, next week
2. Sentences
What are you going to do this evening? I‘m going to the cinema.
3. Dialogues
Wu: What are you going to do on the weekend?
John: I’m going to visit my grandparents this weekend.
Wu: Is it far?
John: Yes, so I ?m going by train.
Unit Three What are you going to do?( Section B)
1.Words and phrases
magazine, dictionary, comic book, newspaper, post card
2.Sentences
What are you going to do? I‘m going to buy an English book in the bookstore.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
When are you going? This afternoon.
4. Dialogues
Amy: Where are you going this afternoon?
Chen: I’m going to the bookstore.
Amy: What are you going to buy?
Chen: I am going to buy a comic book.
Amy: When are you going?
Chen: I‘m going at 3 o‘clock.
5. Phonics
/a:/ path father Mars nasty asking
/Λ/ thumb thus must nut hungry
Exercises
1. Choose the correct answer
( )1. 杂志 A book B story-book C magazine D picture （ ）2.打扫 A clean B visit C read D take
（ ）3.晚上 A tomorrow B morning C afternoon D evening （ ）4.星期 A weekend B weekday C week D Sunday （ ）5.忙碌的 A free B new C busy D buy
2. Make sentences
(1) you, are, do, to this, evening, going, what
(2) my, clean, I, going, room, am, to
(3) by, am, going, train
(4) visit, are, going, we, aunt, my, to
(5) this, theme park, I‘m, to, going, afternoon
3. Match
( )1. tomorrow morning A 一本漫画书
( )2.Sunday afternoon B 植树
( )3. a comic book C一位自然老师
( )4.this weekend D明天上午
( )5.plant trees E这周末
( )6.a science teacher F 星期天下午
4. Answer the questions （就划线部分提问）
(1) I‘m going to t
(2) I‘m going to read a book
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(3) I‘m going to
(4) I‘m going to
(5) I‘m going to
5. Fill in blanks
A: Mom! Let B: What is it?
A: I‘m going toa picnic.
B: Oh….?
. Can I go with them?
B: A: To the park.
B: is the picnic?
A: It‘s Saturday afternoon.
B: Ok, you can go.
A: Great, thank you. Mom!
B: Have a good time.
6. 根据汉语提示写答句
（1） What are you going to do tomorrow? (游泳)
(2) When are you going to visit your aunt?（周五晚上）
(3)Where are you going?（图书馆）
(4) What are you going to be in 20 years‘ time?（护士）
(6) How are you going there?（乘地铁）
7. Tick or cross
( ) 1. 在周末 this weekend
（ ）2.明天下午 tomorrow afternoon （ ）3.今天上午 this morning （ ）4.去旅行 take a trip
（ ）5.去动物园 go to the bookstore
8. 用提示词回答下列问题
（1）Where are you going this evening? ( the cinema)
(2) What are you going to do this weekend? ( clean my room)
(3)What are you going to do tomorrow? (play football)
(4) When are you going to take a trip? (tomorrow)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(5)How are you going to the US? ( plane)
Unit Four I have a pal (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
riding a bike, diving, playing the violin, collecting stamps, making kites
2. Sentences
What‘s your hobby? I like collecting stamps.
3. Dialogues
Wu: What’s your hobby?
John:: I like collecting stamps. What about you?
Wu: Me too. There is a stamp show Sunday. Let‘s go together.
John: I have a friend. He likes collecting stamps, too. Can he go with us?
Wu: Sure!
Unit Four I have a pal (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
goes to work by bus, teaches English, Watches TV at night, reads newspapers every day
2. Sentences
Does your pen pal live in Sahnghai? No, he doesn‘t. He lives in Beijing.
3. Dialogues
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Zhang: My mother is a teacher.
Sarah: Does she teach English?
Zhang: No, she doesn’t. She teaches math.
Sarah: Does she teach you math?
Zhang: Yes, she does.
4. Phonics
/ε/ shirt learn ragwort
/ / usher pleasure colour mirror
Exercises
1. Choose the answers
( ) 1.爱好 A like B hobby C happy D baby
( ) 2.骑 A read B red C ride D rid
( ) 3.跳水 A dive B swim C drive D drink
( ) 4 邮票 A violin B kite C bike D stamp
( ) 5.相同的 A some B different C same D play
2. Write the correct forms
(1) watch(第三人称单数)
(2) newspaper（复数）
(3) left（反义词）
(4) ride（-ing形式）
(5) teach（第三人称单数）
(6) does not（缩写形式）
(7) go（第三人称单数）
(8) her（主格形式）
3.Match
( )1. Does her mother teach math? A I like diving
( )2. Does her father go to work by car? B Yes, he is.
( )3. What‘s your hobby? C No, I don‘t.
( )4. Is your father a driver? D Yes, She has many pan pals.
( )5. Do you like watching TV? E tomorrow
( )6. How does he go home? F No, she doesn‘t.
( )7.When are you going there? G Yes, he does.
( )8. Does Alice have a pen pal? H on foot
4.Choose the correct meanings
( )1. I write a e-mail to Alice every week.
A 我每天给爱丽丝写信。[www.61k.com]
B 我每周给爱丽丝写一封电子邮件。
( )2.Ann usually watches cartoons on TV.
A 安通常看电视。
B 安通常在电视上看卡通片。
( ) 3. I am excited.
A 我很兴奋。
B 我很高兴。
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
( ) 4.Alice and her sister look the same.
A 爱丽丝和她妹妹看上去不一样，
B 爱丽丝和她妹妹看上去长得一样。（www.61k.com]
5. 根据要求转换句型
(1) My father lives in the city.(改为一般疑问句)
(2) Does your mother teach English?（做出肯定回答）
(3)Does he like collecting stamps?（做出否定回答）
(3) I goo to school by bus.（改为he作主语）
6. 选择填空
（1） he live in the country?
A .is B. Do C. Does
(2) My friend singing.
A like B likes C liking
(3) Who she?
A is B does C do
(4) Does she go to school car?
A in B on C by
(5) This is A I B me C my
Unit Five What does she do?(Section A)
1. Words and phrases
singer, writer, TV reporter, actor, actress, artist
2. Sentences
What does your father do? He is a teacher.
3. Dialogues
Chen: What does your mother do ?
John: She is a TV reporter.
Chen: What does your father do?
John: He is a teacher. He teaches English.
Unit Five What does she do?(Section B)
1. Words and phrases
engineer, accountant, policeman, salesperson, cleaner
2. Sentences
What does your father do? He is an engineer.
How does she go to work? He goes to work by bike,
3. Dialogues
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Chen: What does your mother do?
Mike : She is an accountant.
Chen: Where does she work?
Mike: She works in a car company.
Chen: How does she go to work?
Mike: She goes to work by bus.
4. Phonics
/u:/ woof who choose juice
/u/ wood hook childhood
Exercises
1. 根据中文意思，选择正确的单词
（1）（ ）艺术家 A artist B actor C actress
（2）（ ）销售员 A engineer B accountant C salesperson
（3）（ ）清洁工 A writer B cleaner C driver
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
（4）（ ）电视台记者 A TV reporter B baseball player C engineer
（5）（ ）（男）警察 A policeman B policeman C police
2.Fill in the blanks
does your mother do?
B: She is accountant.
A: does she B: She works a car company.
A: does she do everyday?
B: she works with A: does she go to work?
B: She to work bus.
3选择填空
（ ）1. does she do? She is an actress.
A Where B How C What D When
( your father work in a school?
A Does B Do C Is D Are
( ) 3. She is engineer.
A the B a C an D /
( ) 4. A salesman is a
A woman B man C girl D person
( ) 5. He helps the bank their money well.
A uses B using C us D use
5. Make sentences
(1) goes, work, by, she, to , motocycle
(2) is, a , he, policeman
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(3) he , does, where, work
(4) father, sick, helps, people, my
(5) is, woman, who, the, beautiful
6. Fill in the blanks
(1) His father is (a) actor.
(2) My dad is a (clean) in the zoo.
(3) (do) your father do?
(4) My dad (go) to work by bus,
(5) (work) hard every day for us!
7. 选择正确的译文
（ ）1.He takes me to school.
A他带我去公司 B 他带我去学校 C 他带我去图书馆
（ ）2.His father is an actor.
A 他父亲是个工程师 B 他父亲是各司机 C 他父亲是各演员 （ ）3. What does your uncle do?
A 你叔叔是干吗的？ B 你叔叔是什么？ C 你叔叔做吗？
（ ）4.Her father goes by bicycle.
A 她父亲骑自行车去 B 她母亲骑自行车来 C 她父亲坐车去 （ ）5. Where does he work?
A 他是干什么的？ B 他 在哪里工作 C 他怎么去上班
Unit Six The story of rain( Section A)
1. Words and phrases
`rain, stream, cloud, sun, vapour, bread, flour, wheat
2. Sentences
Where does the rain come from? It comes from the clouds.
3. Dialogues
Where does the rain come from? It comes from the clouds.
Where does the cloud come from? It comes from the vapour.
Where does the vapour come from? It comes from the water from the river.
How can the water become the vapour? The sun shines and the water becomes vapour.
Unit Six The story of rain( Section B)
1. Words and phrase
seed, soil, sprout, plant
2. Sentences
First, we have the seed.
3. Dialogues
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Teacher: What are you going to do this afternoon?
Zhang: I‘m going to plant flower seeds in our garden.
Teacher: How do you do that?
Zhang: It‘s easy. First, put the seed in the soil.
Teacher: What should you do then?
Zhang: Water it. In several days, you can see the sprout.
Phonics
/ / shorts towards trough draw
/ / pots odds tropic drop
Exercises
1. Match
( ) 1. come from A 露出
( ) 2.come out B 落下， 降下
( ) 3.little water drop C 升到空中
( ) 4. fall down D 来自
( ) 5. feel warm E 越来越高
( ) 6. go up to the sky F 变成水蒸汽
( ) 7.higher and higher G 感到温暖
( ) 8.become vapour H 小水滴
2. Make sentences
1. comes, flour, bread, from
2. does, cloud, the , where, from, come
3. the ,am, to, I, sky, going
4. sun, out, comes, the, shines, and
5. day, is, a, sunny, it
3. Find the answers
A 照耀 B 几个，一些 C 仍然 D 土壤 E 小溪 F 应该阳
sprout ( ) seed( ) stream ( ) shine ( should( ) several( ) still( ) sun(
4. Complete the dialogues
A : What are you to do this afternoon?
B: I‘m going plant some wheat.
A: do you do that?
B: First, dig the G 苗芽 H 种子 I 太) soil ( ) )
4.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
B: What should you do A: Then put the in the soil.
B: And then?
A: Water it. Wait for the . You can see the wheat in months.
5. Make sentences
(1) tomorrow, going, to, plant, flower, a, am, I
(2) seeds, soil, put, the, in, the, first
(3) you, come, where, from, do
(4) some, want, popcorn, I
(5) me, for, wait
6. Choose the answers
（ ）1. 节约水 A waste water B use water C save water （ ）2.来自 A come B come from C come on （ ）3.需要水 A need water B save water C come on （ ）4.在海里 A in the river B in the sea C in the water
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
PEP六年级下册教学计划
Unit One How tall are you? (Section A)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Teaching content
1. Words and phrases
Dinosaurs, taller, stronger, older, younger, shorter
2. Sentences
(1) -You are taller than your brother.
-Yes! I‘m 160cm tall. He is 159cm tall.
(2) – How old are you?
- I‘m 12 years old. I‘m older than you.
3. Dialogues
John: How tall are you?
Wu: I‘m 164cm tall. You are shorter than me.
John: Yes. I‘m 160cm.You are 4cm taller than me.
4. Passages(Page 6)(Finish the sentences)
5. Grammar-形容词的比较级
（1） 构成方法
①单音节和少数双音节词加-er, -est构成，在加词尾时注意：A: 一般直接加词尾；
B：以e结尾的词，加-r-st构成；C:以“辅音+y‖结尾的 词，变y为I,在加词尾。[www.61k.com］
D：以一个辅音字母结尾的 词，要双写这个辅音字母再加词尾，
② 其他词在前面加-more –most 构成
③特殊的比较级和 最高级
原级 比较级 最高级
good/well better best
bad/ill worse worst
many/much more most
little less least
far farther/ further farthest/furthest
old older/ elder oldest/ eldes
(2) 一般用来表示“比….更….” 通常用连词than引起，为了避免重复，有些成分可以省略。
(3) 特殊句型：①more and more ② the more……the more ③much or less
④more (less) than ⑤ so much the better(worse)
(4) 形容词最高级在使用时，前面通常加定冠词，并有一个短语或者从句表示在哪个范围的情况。
6. Reading
Our school
Our school is big and green.
Teaching buildings are modern and clean.
Teachers are kind and students are nice.
Flowers are read and trees are green.
We are leaning and we are playing.
Our school life is interesting.
Exercises
1. 将单词于音标连线
∕beibi∕ /baik/ /b i/ pain/
Boy baby bike tail
2. 选词填空
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
bigger heavier stronger shorter thinner
(1) Line up from＿＿to taller.
(2) My feet are＿＿than yours.
(3) This box is full of books, It‘s ＿＿than that one
(4) –I‘m stranger than you.
-Yes, I‘m ＿＿than you.
(5) A tiger is ＿＿than a cat.
3.写出下列单词
litlet＿＿ sezi＿＿ waer＿＿ shoretr＿＿ heaveri＿＿ younerg＿＿
4.写出下列单词的比较级
small＿＿ long＿＿ strong＿＿ thin＿＿ big＿＿ old＿＿ 5单选
（1）-How ＿＿you?
- I‘m 40kg.
A much B heavy C many
(2) –How ＿＿is Tom?
- He is 160cm tall.
A heavy B tall C big
(3)-How ＿＿are you?
- I‘m 14 years old.
A tall B old C heavy
(4)My brother is ＿＿than me
A heavy B heavier C heavyer
(5) My legs ＿＿longer than yours
A am B is C are
(6) I‘m ＿＿than you.
A tall and strong B taller and stronger C taller and strong
6连词成句
（1） than you are 4cm me taller
(2) one am year I older you than
(5) long is how your ruler
(6) you handsome more than I am
(7) hands my are than bigger yours
7 Reading
My best friends
Jim and Kim are my best friends, Jim is short and quiet, Kim is tall and strong, but not fat. Kim and I like to play football. We often kick the ball on the playground, But Jim dose not play football with us. He likes to read books in the library. Sometimes he likes to listen
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
to music. In the evening, Jim often helps Kim and me with our English. We talk and laugh. We are best friends
1. Read the passage and choose ―T‖ for ―True‖ ―F‖ for ―false‖
( ) 1. Jim is tall and strong
( ) 2 Kim is tall but fat.
( ) 3. Kim and I like to play football.
2. Choose the answer
( ) 1Kim is tall and strong, but not＿＿
A thin B heavy C slim D fat
( ) 2.Kim and I ＿＿to play football.
A likes B liking C like D liked
( ) 3.Jim ＿＿play football with us.
A dosen‘t B isn‘t C don‘t D aren‘t
Unit One How tall are you? (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
heavier thinner bigger longer smaller
2 Sentences
(1) His tail is longer.
(2) His head is smaller.
3 Dialogues
Mike: How heavy are you?
Zhang: I‘m 48kg.
Mike: I‘m thinner than you, and shorter.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
Zhang: Yes. I‘m bigger and stronger than you.
4 Passages (P9)
5. Phonics
合口双元音／ei/ /oi/ / i/
/p/ /b/ /t/ /d/
/ei/ pain baby tail day
/ i/ pine bike type dive
/ i/point boy toy doven
Unit Two What’s the matter, Mike? (Section A)
1. Words and phrases
have a fever（发烧） have a cold（伤风） hurt（受伤） have a sore throat（喉痛）
a toothache（牙痛） have a headache(头痛) earache （耳朵痛）
stomachache（胃痛） sore nose(喉痛)
2. Sentences
have
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(1) How do you feel if you have the flu?
(2) What do you do if you have the flu?
5. Phonics /ou/ /au/
/k/ /n/ /h/ /l/ /s/ /r/
/ou/ coat know hole load soap rose
/au/ count now house loud south arouse
Exercises
1. Reading
Weather
In the morning, The sun is shining.So two ants carry their food out of their holes to make them dry. Suddenly, it is cloudy and latter it rains heavily. All of their food are wet. They cry and ask their parents for help.
Finally, the ants all carry their food home. The two ants also carry their food out of their holes to make them dry. They are happy.
Note: suddenly突然 dry 干的
Read and answer
(1) What‘s the weather like on the first day?
(2) Why do these ants carry their food out of their holes?
(3) Are they happy on the first day?
(4) What can their parents help them?
(5) What do they do on the second day?
Choose the right answer.
( )（1）-Do you like raining?
- ----------
A No, he is B Yes, I like C Yes, I do
( ) (2)- -Where is your cake?
--- ---------------
A I have some cakes B I want to eat C It is on the table
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Exercise on books
1. Choose the right answer
(1) A: What‘s the matter?
B: ＿＿
A My leg hurts B I have a book C Very well, thanks
(2) A: How dose Will feel?
B: ＿＿
A He is sad B She is sad C I‘m sad
(3) A: I failed the test.
B: ＿＿
A I‘m happy to hear that B I‘m sad to hear that C I‘m excited to hear that
(4) A:My parents is going to buy me a piano. I‘m very＿
B: ＿
A sad B tired C happy
(5) A: What‘s the matter＿,Sophia?
B: She is sad.
A to B with C for
2. Make the sentences
(1) do feel how you
(2) throat is sore my
(3) have you do headache a
(4) Mitchell is a angry little
(5) Am going on a trip I
Unit Two What’s the matter, Mike? (Section B)
1. Words and phrases
tired(累的) excited（兴奋的） happy（高兴的） sad（伤心的） bored（无聊的）气的)
2. Sentences
(1) How dose Amy feel? She is tired. / She is happy. / She is sad.
angry(生
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
5. Grammar- 一般将来时
1. 一般将来时的构成形式: 主语+ will/shall+动词原形
（1） 肯定形式：主语+ will/shall+动词原形 Eg: I will go to school.
（2） 否定形式：主语+will/ shall+not+动词原形 eg: She is not going to the party.
（3） 疑问句式：shall/ will+主语+动词原形+？
肯定回答：Yes, 主语+will/shall
否定回答： No, 主语+will/shall+not
2. 一般将来时的用法
（1） 表示在将来时间发生的动作或存在的状况，常于表示将来的时间状语连用，ex:
tomorrow, next week, next month, next year.
Eg: we will learn English next week.
(2) 在复合句中（含时间状语或条件状语），从句一般用一般现在时表将来。（www.61k.com］
Eg: We will come if it dosen‘t snow.
3. 将来时的多种表示方法
（1） 表示计划要发生的事 “be going to +动词”
Eg: I am going to be a teacher.
（2）表示“正要，刚要发生的动作”“be about+不定式”
Eg: We are about to leave.
(3) 按照日程要发生的动作，“be to +动词原型”
Eg: There is to be a party next week.
(3) 表示位置转移的词，用现在进行时表示将来。Eg: go, come, leave, arrive, fly.
Eg: The bus is coming.
Exercises
1. 用所给词的适当形式填空
(1) The class＿(begin) soon.
(2) What＿you＿(do)tomorrow?
(3) They＿(go) to Xihuayuan Park tomorrow.
(4) Michael ＿(leave) on Friday.
2. 选词填空
（1） Fish without water.
A dies B is going to die C won‘t die D will die
you leave for Beijing?
A do, leave B are, leaving C did, leave D were, leaving
a sports game in our school next week.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
A is going to have B are going to be
C will have D is going to be
A sing B am going to sing
C sang D have sang
Exercises
I. Reading
Birthday party
Sam is 12 years old today. We have a birthday party for him. We all gave him some interesting and beautiful presents. Lily also makes a birthday cake for him. The cake was not only big but also beautiful. We burnt the candles, Sang birthday and gave our best wishes to Sam. Happy birthday Sam!
1. Read the passage and answer the questions
(1) How old Was Sam last year?
(2) What did Sam‘s friends do for him?
(3) What was the birthday cake like?
2. Translation the sentences into Chinese
(1) Happy birthday to you!
(2) Best wishes for you!
(3) Have a good time!
3. Choose the right answer
(1) How old is Sam? ( )
A 10 B 12 C 11
(2) ＿gave him a birthday cake, ( )
A Tom B We C Lily
(3) What did we do on Sam‘s birthday party? ( )
A We sang birthday sang B We gave the presents to him
C We burnt the candles D All of the above
Exercises on textbooks
1. 选词填空
Flu hurt game throat excited
(1) In winter, people often get the ＿
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(2) How do they feel before the football ＿starts?
(3) A: What‘s the matter? B: My feet ＿
(4) My ＿is sore. I need some water.
(5) Will kicks the ball. It‘s a goal! Everybody is ＿
2. Translation
(1) What‘s the matter?
(2) Do you have a headache?
(3) How do you feel?
(4) There is a football game between class 1 and class 2.
(5) I win the math test.
Unit Three Last weekend (Section A)
Words
Watched TV washed clothes cleaned the room played football grandparents visited
1.
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Questions:
(1) his grandma Saturday morning.
(2) Sunday morning, he with his friends.
(3) and Sunday afternoon.
5. Grammar— 一般过去时
1. 一般过去时的用法
（1） 表示在某个或者某段时间内发生的动作或存在的状态。(www.61k.com］
Eg: Helen was here a moment ago.
（2） 表示过去的习惯动作。Eg: I read English every morning when I was a student.
（3） Used to 和would也常用来表示过去的习惯性动作或者状态（used to表示不再存在
的过去的习惯性动作或者状态，后接动词原型），would强调过去动作的重复，不强调是否存在。
Eg: Wang Xuan used to play Wushhu every morning.
2. 一般过去时的基本结构
（1）肯定句：①主语+动词过去时+其他 ②主语+was/were+其他
Eg: I played basketball yesterday.
My last weekend was great.
(2)否定句：①主语+didn‘t+动词原型+其他 ②主语+was/were+not +其他
Eg: Sun didn‘t play computer yeaterday.
I wasn‘t happy yesterday evening.
(3)一般疑问句：①Did +主语+动词原型+其他？
回答：Yes, 主语+did./ No, 主语+did +not
Eg: Did you play sports last weekend?
Yes, I did. / No, I did not.
②Was/Were +主语+其他？
回答：Yes,主语+was/were. / No, 主语+was/were +not
Eg: Was your weekend good?
Yes, it was good./ No, it was not.
(4) 特殊疑问句： 特殊疑问句+一般疑问句语序
Eg: Where did you go yesterday?
What did you do last Friday?
3. 动词过去时的构成
（1） 规则动词过去时的构成
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
①一般再词尾加-ed够成。［www.61k.com)Eg: play-played
②动词末尾是不发音的e时，在e后直接加d. eg: like-liked live-lived
③重读闭音节中，末尾只有一个 辅音字母的，先双写这个辅音字母，再加-ed
Eg: stop-stopped drop-dropped
④以辅音字母加y结尾的词，要先变y为i，再加ed. Eg: study-studied carry-carried
marry-married worry-worried
（2） 常见的不规则动词的过去时
Do-did go-went have-had read-read am/is-was are-were see-saw come-came run-ran say-said put-put write-wrote eat-ate take-took sit-sat feel-felt get-got
Exercise
1. 根据汉语完成句子
（1）We （参观）the Science Museum last weekend.
弹钢琴)the piano yesterday.
(3)I 去学校)to school at 8:00 yesterday.
看电影)an interesting movie last night.
2.句型转换
（1）I watched TV last night.(对画线部分提问)
（2） He writes a letter to his mother.(用yesterday改写句子)
（3）Linda ate some bread yesterday.(改为否定句)
（4）Will had a great time.(改为疑问句)
（4） Sophia did her homework at home.(对画线部分提问)
2. 单选
（1）He to Yuantong zoo yesterday.
A go B didn‘t went C didn‘t go D going
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
(2)How your vacation?
It was great.
A is B did C was D were
it yesterday?
A is B was C were D are
(4)I A do the reading B did some reading
C did reading D do some reading
6. `Phonics /I / /e / /u /
/p/ /f/ /h/ / / / /
/I / period fear here shear cheer
/e / pear fair hair share chair
/u / poor
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Exercise on text books
I Reading
Yesterday was Friday. I took the final exam. I finished my work quickly. I think I will make a good result. But, to my surprise, I got a bad result because of my careless. I felt very sad.
Today is Saturday. It was a wonderful day. My friends all go to the park and have a picnic, but I don‘t go there with them. I stay at home study. If I study hard, I will make progress in my study. No pains, no gains. I will not give up myself. I think, I am going to have a bright tomorrow.
备注：bright 美好的 final exam期末考试 stay at home留在家里
make progress 取得进步
1. Answer the questions
(1) What day was it for the final exam?
(2) Why did he fail in the exam?
(3) Did he go to the park on Saturday?
(4) What did he do?
2. Arrange the right sentence sequence
(1)bright am I have going to a tomorrow
(2)stay home I at a holiday for
(3)wishes everyone for Best
II Exercises on text books
1. Write out the words
lit seden
felw2. 写出下列单词的过去时
3. Choose the right answer
A are B do C did
A tomorrow B last weekend C next Sunday
(3)I was grateful the dog.
A with B for C to
(4)Helen her homework yesterday.
A do B dose C did
bike yesterday
A with B by C on
4. 连词成句
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
（1）did you what do yesterday
(2)you did go the to park weekend last
(3)visited I grandparents my yesterday
(4)played Will football Rick with
Unit Three Last weekend (Section B)
Words
`went to a park(去公园) went swimming（去游泳） read a book went fishing （去钓鱼） went hiking（去远足）
1.（看书）
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
Exercises
I Reading
Yesterday was Sunday. I had a party with my friends in my house. I am very happy, because Sunday was my birthday. My mother made a lot of delicious food for my good friends. At the beginning of the party, I received many gifts from my friends and parents. Mother and father hope me to be more and more clever. The friends blesses mo to happy everyday.
And then, we sang the birthday song, ate the birthday cake and food. At last, we went to a park and flied a kite together. We sang and danced. We were very happy, I will remember this birthday forever.
Note: housework(家务活) excellent（优秀的） for example（例如）
go fishing（去钓鱼）
1. Fill the blanks according to the text
Yesterday was my birthday, my mother made (许多)delicious food for my good
开始) of the party, I 收到) many gifts from my friends and then we sang the (生日歌)。（www.61k.com］
At last, we
2. Read and choose the proper word to fill in the blank
(1)Yesterday was Sunday. I (have, had) a party with my friends in my house, I (received, receive) many gifts from my friends and parents.
(2) We (3)At last, I (4) We
II Exercises on textbooks
1. 音标，单词，汉语连线
/pe / beer 梨
/pu / pear 啤酒
/bi / poor 这儿
/hi / chair 贫穷的
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
/ / here 椅子
2. 用所给单词适当形式填空
（1）I usually hiking on Sunday.(go)
(2)Last weekend, I (3)I am you go home by bike yesterday?
B: No, I did not.( do)
(5)I 3. Translate the sentences into Chinese.
(1)What did you do last weekend?
(2)Did you go swimming yesterday?
(3)I read a book last night.
(4) I was grateful to him.
(5)Will went to a park by bike yesterday.
Unit Four My holiday(Section A)
1. Words
learned Chinese sang and danced took Chinese climbed a mountain
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(1)On Monday John (2)On Tuesday he (3)On Wednesday he (4)On Thursday he I. Reading
Li Feng was always concerned for his comrades when he was in the army.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
One day, Xiao Zhou ,a solider in Li Feng‘s squad, got a letter from home. After reading it, he looked worried, But he did not tell Li Feng anything. Li Feng thought: there must be something. Soon he found out that Zhou‘ s father was seriously ill. Li Feng wrote a letter and send the money to Zhou‘s father secretly.
Later, Xiao zhou got another letter from home. He knew his father was getting better because of ―his money‖. But he didi not know who wrote the letter and send the money.
It was one of Li Feng‘s good deeds. He WAS AS MILD AS Spring for his comrades.
Note: comrades 同志 solider 战士 concerned关心的 in the army在部队里 a solider一名战士 get a letter 收到一封信
1.Read and judge
( ) (1) Li Feng was solider.
( ) (2)Xiao zhou got a letter from his friend.
( ) (3) Xiao zhou did not got a letter . So he looked worried.
( ) (4) Li Feng told Xaio zhao about the money.
2 Read and choose
How when where what
(1) do you watch TV? I watch TV at 7:00.
(2) (3) (4) She studies in a primary school.
3. Find out the mistake of the sentences and correct them.
(1) At six.
A when B where C who
(2) A at B 去掉 C in
(3)
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
A at B on C with
(4) A on B in C of
II Exercises on text books
1. 改正下列单词
elpehatn 写出下列单词的过去时
3.单选
(1)What did you do your holiday?
A in B On C at
A on B in C by
(3)We A have B has D had
st.
A on B in C at
did you go?
B: I went to Beijing.
A where B when C why
B: On foot.
A when B where C How
(7)A:Did you have a good time there?
B: Yes, I A do B did C does
4. 连词成句
（1）climbed I mountain a my on holiday
(2)went he bus by his holiday on
(3)played we pingpong Wednesday on
(4)went she yesterday ice-skating
(5)did how you to Beijing go
Unit Four My holiday(Section B)
1.Words
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
IReading
Tom: Nice to meet you!
Alice: Nice to meet you, too. Are you a fresh man ?
Tom: Yes, could you tell me where the library is?
Alice: Certainly. Come here with me.
Tom: My name is Tom. Your name?
Alice: My name is Alice. What classes are you in?
Tom: I am in class two. What about you?
Alice: I am in class 2. Too. We are in the same class! We are classmate.
Tom: Yes! Do you like reading?
Alice: Yes. I like reading English books. And you?
Tom: I like reading story books.
Alice: Oh, here it is, Let‘s go into the library.
Tom: Ok., let us go!
Note: freshman新生 library图书馆in the same在同一个班 make friends交朋友
1. Read and judge
( ) (1) Alice is a freshman.
( ) (2) Tom is in class 2 and Tom is in class 1.
( ) (3) Tom likes story books and Alice is too.
( ) (4) They go into the classroom.
2. Arrange the right sequence of the sentences
( ) Yes, please.
( ) What is the time now?
( ) Excuse me, can I ask you a questions?
( ) It‘s half past nine.
( ) Thank you very much. Goodbye!
II Exercise on textbooks
1. 选词填空
Took bought got singing does
(2) I left Beijing yesterday and
touchdog PEP三年级-六年级教学内容
(3)Tom (4) Listen! A girl is (5)He usually 2.翻译
（1） What did you do on your holiday?
(2)How did you go to Beijing?
(3) Where did Tom go on his holiday?
(5) Mitchell went to Xingjiang by train.
(6)I went to skiing on my holiday.
扩展：pep三年级上册英语 / pep三年级下册英语 / pep六年级上册英语
二 : PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
Unit 1 How Do You Go There?
第一课时教学设计
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、读、写短语：on foot，by bike，by bus，by train。[www.61k.com]
2． 能够听、说、认读短语：by plane，by ship，by subway。
3． 能用句子“How d0 you go to school? How do you go to Canada／??”来替换 询问别人的出行方式；并能够用句子“I go by?”进行回答。
4． 听懂、会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
5． 帮助学生了解交通规则，并在生活中自觉遵守交通规则。
二、教学重点、难点分析
本课时的教学重点和难点是掌握四会短语和A Let's learn部分中运用某种交通工具去某地的表达法，并能替换关键词进行问答。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备Let's start部分和主情景图的教学挂图。
2． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
3． 教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。
四、教学步骤
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)复习副词：always，usually，often，sometimes，never的读音与词义。
T: When do you get up?/ When do you go to school?...(引导学生用always，usually，often，sometimes回答)
(2)T：Today I go to school on bus. I usually go to school on foot. 教师利用肢体动作帮助学生理解句子意思。
T：What about you? Do you go by bike or by bus? Do you go on foot? Or by car? 师生之间自由会话，引出几种常见的交通方式。
引导学生看本课Let’s start部分的标图并回答问题。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)Let's chant
教师放本课Let's chant部分的录音，唱到on foot时，全班跺跺脚；唱到by Car／bike／bus／plane／train的时候，学生做出相应的动作。然后教师根据歌谣内容随机出示Let's learn部分的单词卡片加深学生印象，全班学生再跟录音边唱边做一遍。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's learn
(1)教师做动作，自问自答：“How do I go to school? I go to school by bike．”并在黑板上写下：by bike。教师再重复刚才的句子并问某一学
生： What about you? How do you go to school? 教师帮助学生说出完整的句子：“I go to school by?”并将相应的短语写在黑板上。
(2)看短语贴卡片游戏
教师依次出示画着不同交通工具的短语卡片，让学生迅速地贴在黑板上的“by”短语旁边，教师领读短语和句子“l go to school by...”
(3)“快速反应”游戏
教师说出某个短语，如：by bike，让学生做相应的动作并说出句子，如：
I go to school by bike．
(4)教师拿出刚才学生可能没有提到的交通工具的图片，如：by plane／subway/ ship／boat等，呈现和练习这些短语。然后指着课本上的配图问：
“What can you see in the pictures?”注意引导学生理解“地铁”的含义：
“It's an underground railway in a city．It travels very fast．”教师领读新学短语。
(5)学生听录音，跟读Let's learn部分的内容。教师注意纠正学生的语音、语调
1
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(6)教师引导学生进行单词的拼读竞赛。（www.61k.com］可空出单词中的元音字母让学生填写,也可打乱组成单词的字母的顺序，让学生重新排序，组成单词。
(7)Let's play
教师请学生说一些地点，比如：school，Beijing，the US，the moon等；教师鼓励学生大胆想象出行方式和所去地点。然后学生两人结对进行句型操练，一人问
“How do you go to Beijing／the USA／the moon?”另一学生给出答案：
“I go by train/plane／spaceship．”
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)Main scene
教师引导学生看主情景图，说出其中表现的交通方式。学生多能说出：
on foot by bike，by subway。如有学生问及小丑骑的独轮车以及幼儿骑的三轮儿童车教师可补充说明那分别是unicycle和tricycle；而自行车bike的另一说法：bicycle，意为两轮车。
(2)学生做Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习；教师指导学生规范书写。新学伊始，教师非常有必要对学生重申一下书写的要求。
(3)学生背诵并抄写四会单词；
(4)学生预习c Let's sing部分的歌曲。
五、课后反思
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能听、说、读、写四会掌握句子：
“How do you go to school? Usually I go to school on foot．Sometimes I go by bike．”并能在情景中正确运用。
2．能够表述自己以何种方式上学并简单陈述原因，如：Usually I go to school by bus because it's fast．
3．能够听董Let's try的录音内容并选出正确选项。掌握
Let’s talk and read and write部分的句型。
4．学会调查和统计、分析数据，并能表示出来。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是听、说、读、写句型：How do you go to school? Usually Sometimes I go by?
2．本课时的教学难点是学生书写四会句子并能简单陈述选择某种交通方式上学的原因。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
2．教师准备本单元A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。
3．教师课前在黑板上画出空白柱状图，用于统计班内学生上学方式的调查
4．学生每人准备一张卡片，画一个印象最深刻的交通标志。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
T: “Good morning! How do you go to school today? What about you? Do you go by bus，too?”然后学生复习Let's chant部分的歌谣。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师出示单词卡片，提问：“How do you go to school?”学生根据图片内容回答：“I go to school by?”师生会话直到班级里大部分学生能够准确说出图中交通工具的名称以及该句型。然后学生两人一组练习句型：
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
“How do you go to school? I go to school by?”
(2)Let's try
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's talk
(1)教师放课文录音，之前向学生提出问题：“How does Sarah go to school? listen．”学生听后模拟Sarah来回答问题。(2)学生跟读录音，然后两人一组替换句型中的关键词练
2
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
习对话。[www.61k.com]
(3)Group work
T：“How do I go to school，do you know? Ask me，please!”然后教师在黑板上画一辆自行车、一辆公共汽车和一辆计程车的图案，并分别在后面两图旁标当地的价格，如：l yuan，7 yuan，回答说：“Usually I go to school by bike。
because it's good exercise．Sometimes I go by bus，
because it's cheap．It costs l yuan. Sometimes I go by taxi，because it's fast，but it's too expensive．It costs 1o yuan．
教师让学生四人一组，了解同学用何种互方式上学，并鼓励学生简单阐述原因，如：My home is near．It's fast．It's cheap．good exercise．?
(4)Let’ read 学生四人小组阅读，并完成课后练习。
(5)听录音，跟读。教师对学生人有疑问的地方讲解。
4.巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生回家调查父母及其他亲戚的上班方式，写一篇小作文。
(2)找出peak/beat/team/deal/pig/big/tin/dish的读音之间的区别。
五、课后反思
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够充分理解并正确朗读对话，能完成文后回答问题的练习。
2． 能够了解辅音，/p／，/b/，/t/，/d／与元音/i:/，/i/的发音规则.
3． 了解Good to know部分的内容，能够辨认常见的交通标志，如：Cross way，No entry，No bikes，Turn right和No left turn。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是学生能够充分理解并正确朗读对话。
2． 本课时的教学难点是如何指引他人在不同地点换用不同的交通工具到达某一
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备录音机以及A Let's read，C Pronunciation和c Let's sing部分的录音。
2． 教师课前在教室里张贴各种交通工具的图片或准备多媒体来展示。
3． 学生每人准备一张白纸。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
教师放c Let's sing部分的录音，学生跟唱。可组织男女生各唱一遍，看谁好。
2．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)“最佳路线”活动
教师用简笔画呈现两个情境：Bob家住在山上，山脚有一条河，河对岸有公交车站通向学校；May家离学校很远，家附近有个地铁站，May的学校附近.虽没有地铁站，但有一路公交车直通地铁站的入口。教师让学生分组活动，设计最佳上学路线，原则是省时方便。教师注意指导学生使用连词then来表示动作的先后顺序。教师要求各组派一人假设自己是Bob或May，上讲台汇报。
(2)教师说：
“Now let's read the dialogue and find out how Sarah goes to the park Can you draw the route on your paper?”学生两人一小组分角色朗读对话，教师在教室里巡回走动，解惑答疑，并指导学生简单画出Sarah的路线。
(3)教师展示学生画出的路线并示范如何描述Sarah去公园的路程：“First，
Sarah Can go to Zhang Peng's home by bike．Next, Sarah and Zhang Peng go to the bus stop on foot．Then they can go to the park by bus．”教师板书first，next，then，让学生知道恰当使用一些连词有助于表达更为流畅。然后请几名学生依照顺序来描述Sarah和Zhang Peng去公园的路线，比一比谁说得最好。
(5)教师放Let's read部分的录音，学生跟读。
(6)学生两人一组练习对话。
3
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
4、巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)教师随意抽取一张学生课前填写的调查表，对该学生说：“You've been to
Harbin．Is it a nice city ?What can you see there? How do you go there?”问同组其他三名学生以上几个问题。（www.61k.com)学生仍以四人一小组的形式展开活动，用问题：
“Do you go to?by??
测某一小组成员到达表格中目的地的方式。一人只有一次猜测机会，不对，大家再一起问：“How do you go there?”该学生回答。每小组选一名代表描述自己曾去过的某个地方。
(2)Good to know
教师询问学生课本上各个交通标志的意思：“What's the meaning?”然后帮助学生回答：“Turn right．Crosswalk．One way．”等。再让学生完成图与文字搭配的练习。鼓励学生展示课前绘制的交通标志图并寻找更多交通标志与其他同学进行交流.
(3)学生听录音、跟读对话。
(4)学生完成本部分活动手册配套练习。
五、课后反思
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读以下短语：Stop at a red light．Wait at a yellow light．Go at a green light．能够听、说、读、写短语和单词：stop，wait，traffic lights，traffic rules。
2． 能够了解基本的交通规则，即红灯、黄灯、绿灯的功能；并能听懂英语指令做出 相应的动作。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是掌握四会短语和单词：stop，wait，traffic lights，traffic rules。
2． 本课时的教学难点是书写短语traffic light，traffic rule和理解动词stop，wait的含义。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备兔子舞的音乐和录音机、本课时的录音带及教学挂图。
2． 教师自制教具模拟红绿灯：即在一块板上挂红黄绿三张圆形纸卡。
3． 学生准备本课时的单词卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
“兔子舞”游戏
教师放兔子舞的音乐，全班学生排成长队，后面学生把手搭在前面学生的肩膀上，随着音乐的指令“Left-Right-Go-Turn around-Go，g。，go”，队伍开始向前慢慢移动，教师最好也参与游戏。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
2．预习(Preview)
(1)师生一起吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
(2)教师从歌谣中引出问题：“How d。you go to school?”请学生根据实际情况回 答，复习A部分主要句型。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)教师指着教室里的日光灯说：I like the lights because I can see things clearly at night .Can we see lights in different colours in our city ? Yes! turn light , traffic lights．?
(2)教师边画简笔画，边说：“We have red，yellow，and green lights. We call them traffic lights．，教师板书traffic fights，然后问学生：“What do they mean，do you know?，，学生可能会用汉语回答，教师点头表示肯定，再请学生回答：“When do we stop
4
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
／wait／go?’’引导学生回答：We stop at a red light．．．-
(3)教师出示自制红绿灯，请一名学生随意指向不同的颜色，教师示范动作，比如：看见绿灯，教师一边向前走一边说：“It is a green light. I can go. Go-go。(www.61k.com)go!，，看见黄
灯，停住不动但摆动双臂示意要走：“It is a yellow light. I must wait．Wait-wait-wait! I can go in a moment．”看见红灯，提问学生：“The light is red。Call I go? No，no，no! It's dangerous !I must stop．Stop-stop-stop!”
(4)教师板书stop，wait，go在相应的交通灯旁。为了帮助学生区别stop与wait，可以适当使用汉语解释词义。
（5）Let's play
教师请出若干名学生，根据指令做相应的动作，连续做错两次动作的学生将被淘汰，如：教师说red light，学生停着不动，教师说yellow light，学生做好走的准备，教师说green light，学生往前走。然后换一组学生再做这个游戏，由其中一名学生来发指令。也可让全班学生分成六人一组分别进行小组活动。最后教师小结："Stop at a red fight．Wait at a yellow light-Go at a green light Red light．yellow fight，green light．These are traffic lights．”教师再指着以上三句话总结说：These are traffic rules．
(6)教师继续提问：“What does the‘ traffic rule ’mean?”板书并解释traffic rule， 鼓励学生说出Let's learn部分的三个句子。然后教师说．Yes. These are traffic rules．You must remember the traffic rules．”通过手势帮助学习理解remember的意思。
(7)教师放Let's learn部分的录音，学生跟读。
(8)教师引导学生以竞赛的形式书写四会单词和短语。可先引导学生利用学生卡片背面的灰体词进行单词描红，学生边描边拼读单词。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)师生讨论不同的出行方式及其应当遵循的交通规则。下列问题可供参
(2)学生做B Let's learn部分活动手册配套练习。
(3)学生背诵并抄写四会词语。
(4)学生画一张从家到学校(或从学校到家)的简单路线图，准备下一他同学进行交流。 教学反思：
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听懂、会说并能书写句型：“How Can I get to Zhongshan Park? You can go by the No．15 bus．”能够在情景中正确运用。
2． 能够在对话中正确使用礼貌用语，比如：“Excuse me．Thank you．You're welcome．”等。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是四会掌握句型：How Can I get to Zhongshan Park? You can go By the No．15 bus．
2． 本课时的教学难点是学生能够在实际情景中恰当地表达使用某一交通工具到达某一 目的地。
三．课前准备
1． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
2． 教师准备一张简易地图，要能够呈现本校附近的一些建筑物。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师将全班学生分为两组，每组选派一名代表上讲台发指令。如：Green／red／yellow
5
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
light，各组学生在座位上做动作，做错者坐下，即被淘汰，最后站着的人数多的组胜出。(www.61k.com）
(2)教师让学生用自己的话描述交通规则，表述正确者为小组争得一分，描述有新意者得三分，如：It's a yellow light，I must wait．Now the light is green，I can gO．Don't go at a red light，a car may hit you．
2．预习(Preview)
Let's try
教师放Let's町部分的录音，学生听录音选择相应的图片。
录音内容如下：
Man：Excuse me．how can I get to Dongfang Primary School?
Zhang：You can g0 by the No．14 bus．It's next t0 the nature park．
Man：Thank you．
Zhang：You're welcome．
教师检查有多少学生能够准确区分14与40的发音，如果答对率低，教师要注意纠正。教师还可以板书一组相似的数字，如：13／30，18／80，15／50，教师说英文，学生说出中文的数字，帮助学生区分／-ti：n／与l-u／。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's talk
(1)教师根据学生平时常去的场所提问，如当地的一家电影院、风景点、或学生的祖父母家等：“How can you get to??Can you go by??Is it fast／slow／expensive t0 go by??”进行师生间的自由会话，再让学生感知一下新句型：How can I／you get to??然后，教师请学生根据课本中提供的地图回答问题：“How can I get to Zhongshan Park?”引导学生回答，提示他们坐15路公交车为：“By the No．15 bus．”教师提供完整的答句：“Yes．I can go by the No．15 bus．”教师板书这组句子。
(2)教师继续提问：“It's a place．You can buy food，drink，fruit，vegetables，school things and clothes there．What is it?(It’s a supermarket．)”教师最好出示一张当地比较有名的超市的照片或图片来给出谜底。教师再提问：“How can I get there? By bus or by bike?”然后领读句子：“I can go to the supermarket by?”帮助学生理解supermarket是一个合成词，来源于super与market。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(3)“你说我问”活动
该活动可以进一步巩固生词supermarket与句型“How can you get t0??”教师先示范：“I usually go shopping in Hua Lian Supermarket．I like it．”引导学生提问：“How can you get t0 the supermarket?”教师根据实际情况回答：I can go by the No． bus．Sometimes I go by bike because it's not far．
(4)教师与学生一起继续学习地点名词，如：bank，post office，cinema，教师出示单词卡片引导学生初步认读生词。待学生能基本识别后请本上的配图，提问：“Where is the post office?”学生迅速指向课本相应位置并说：“It's here．”教师也可以通过变换提问方式来提高学性，如：“Can you see a fast food shop in the map?'’让学生一边指地答。
(5)教师引导学生看地图，回答教师的提问：“How can I get to the bank／post office／ cinema??’’可先用短语回答，如：“By bike-／On foot_／By the No．15 bus．”再 引导学生使用完整的句子回答问题。
(6)教师说：“Now let's listen to the tape and find out where Jim is going and how he can get there．'学生听该部分录音，回答问题。
(7)教师再次放该部分录音，学生跟读。
(8)学生两人一组看地图，替换关键词自编对话，
6
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(9)教师把组成四会句子的单词打散后发给学生，或者空缺出四会句子中的重点单词，请学生填会句子。［www.61k.com)
Let's check
教师放录音，学生听录音完成判断题。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)教师出示自制地图，请一名学生协助示范对话：
然后让学生两人或三四人一组，编一个类似的对话并进行表演。
(2)学生拿出上一课时布置的作业，即画一张从家里到学校(或从学校到家)的路线图，四人一组互相描述自己的路线。教师请几名学生以对话的形式汇报同组学生的情况：How do you go t0 school? I go on foot，because my home is near．
(3)学生做本部分活动手册配套练习并书写四会句子。
教学反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1、能够读懂Let's read部分，并能判断短文后的句子是否正确。
能够理解Story time的故事。
2、帮助学生建立自觉遵守交通规则的观念，并了解不同国家交通规则的异同。
二、教学重，难点分析
1、本课时的教学重点是帮助学生理解句型：In China／the US，drivers drive on the right side Of the road．In England and Australia，however，drivers drive On the 1eft side Of the road．
2、本课时的教学难点是学生对文化差异的了解：在中国和美国等国家车辆靠右行驶，但在有些国家车辆靠左行驶，比如英国、澳大利亚、新加坡等地。
三、课前准备
教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
2． 教师准备Zoom，Zip和policeman的头饰。
3． 教师在课前将写有usually，always，often，sometimes的纸条贴在教室的墙上。
4． 教师课前在讲台前腾出一块空问，在地上画出模仿街道的分道线，为本课时活动 做准备。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师说口令：“If you go by car, by bike or 0n foot，you must watch the traffic 1ights and know the traffic rules．Red! Yellow! Green!”学生听音做动作：stop，wait，go。教师不断变换速度，做错动作的学生出局。
(2)教师说动作词，学生说出相应的交通灯的颜色，比如：wait--yellow，go—green，stop—red，学生之问比一比，看谁的反应快。
2．预习(Preview)
教师举起左手，说：“This is my left hand．Show me your left hand! Then，show your right hand．”确定学生能够区分left和right后，请一小组学生上讲台，教师发出的指令做动作：“Turn left．Turn right．Turn back．”然后换另一小组，快做动作准确的小组获胜。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)教师站在课前画好的分道线的右侧，往前走，边走边说：“Now I'm walking on the left
7
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
side of the road．I know the traffic rules．Do you think so?”教师重复. Story time
(1)做B Let's play的游戏，请一名学生代替教师发指令：“stop，wait，go"，其他学生听指令做动作。[www.61k.com］教师说：“You are good children because you know the traffic rules．Let me do it．’’然后教师故意做错几个动作，在学生提醒的时候，抓紧时机说：“I'm sorry．I am against the traffic rules．”然后板书：be against the traffic rules。
(2)教师放c Story time的录音，学生听录音回答问题：“Where do Zoom and Zip want to go? How do they go there?”
(3)学生打开学生用书第13页，教师提问：“Why don't they go by taxi? Why does the policeman stop them?”学生读对话回答问题。
(4)教师放两遍录音，第一遍全班学生跟读，第二遍学生分角色跟读。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生分组戴上头饰表。演A、B部分的对话和c部分的故事。教师注意启发学生的角色意识，尤其是扮演警察的学生要注意表演时的语气与神态需符合身份。
(2)学生做本部分活动手册配套练习。
教学反思：
Unit 2 教案
第一课时
一、teaching aims:
1.能够听、说、读、写单词或短语：hospital，cinema，post office，bookstore
2.能够听、说、认读短语science museum。
3.能够听、说、认读句型：“Where is the library? It's near the post office．”并进行关键词的替换操练。
4.能够理解并会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
5.引导学生在学习过程中注重合作学习，利用课本中设计的Pair work，培养学生合作学习的意识。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
二、teaching importance and difficulties
1、掌握Let's learn部分的四会单词和短语。
2、准确书写四会单词和掌握三会单词museum的发音。
三、preparations:
1教师准备录音机、本课时的录音带
2在黑板上书写单词。
四、procedures:
1. Warm-up
(1)Game
(2)Greeting: Today, I go to school on foot.What about you?
2．Presentation
Let's learn
(1) listen and say
T: I want to post the letter. Where can I go? (post office)
Oh, I feel bad, I need to see a doctor. Where can I go? (hospital)
I’m ok now,I want to see a film, Where can I go? (cinema)
I need to buy some books, where can I go? (bookstore)
Q: Where is the post office? (It’s near the hospital.)
E: We also can say “it’s next to the hospital.” Can you guess what meaning
8
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
of “next to”? (It’s the same as near.)
(2)let’s chant P14
(3)There are other two building. Look at this one,this is a science museum.the other one is library. In the map,there are 2 blanks A and B. Now, please guess where are they?
Sence: I want to go to the library, but I don’t know how to get to the library? Can you help me?
Q: Excuse me,How can I get to the library?
A:
Q: Where is the library?
A:
Listen to the tape,read after it.
(4) Make dialogues
(5) Next week, we will have a long holiday. I want to go to Beijing.I prepare a map. But it’s too small, who can help me write it on Bb?
(6) Do the same with partners.
五、Homework
Copy the 4-skilled words, each 5 times.
六、note:
课后反思
第二课时
一、Teaching aims:
1．能够听、说、认读主要句型：“Where is the cinema／post office／?，
please ?It's next to the hospital／cinema／?Is it far from here? No，
it's not far．”并能在实际情景中熟练运用。(www.61k.com)
2．能够书写四会句子：Where is the cinema，please ?It's next to the hospital．
3．能够听懂Let's try部分，并能根据录音内容选择正确的答案。
4．能够了解音标／e／，／／，／k／，／g／，／f／，／v／，／s／，／z／的音与形；能够读出例词并选择音标与单词和配图正确连线。
5．继续学唱歌曲“Where Are You Going?”
二、Teaching importance and difficulties
1． 4-skilled sentences: Where is the post office／?，please?
It's next to the hospital／cinema／?Is it f打from here ?No,it is not far．
2． ／e／，／／，／k／，／g／，／f／，／v／，／s／，／z／
三、Preparations:
1．教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
2．教师准备Let's talk部分的教学挂图。
3．学生准备好自己的城市设计图。
四、Procedures:
1． Warm-up
(1) Let's chant
(2) Introduce ideal city
Let’s Ss describe their cities in four-people groups, then let the best one introduce for the whole class.
2. Preview
let's try
3. Presentation
Let’s talk
(1)“模拟城市”
Teacher divides the class into eight parts, and each part has a name：
cinema,hospital，post office，bookstore，library，school .
9
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
T:“The cinema is here. The hospital is next to the cinema．”
“The post office is next to the hospital．”
(2)Q：“Is there a cinema near here?”
S1：“No.there isn't．”
Q：“Is there a cinema near here?”
S2：“Yes，there is．”
Q：“Where is the cinema，please?”
S2: “It’s next to the hospital．”
Bb (Where is the cinema, please? It’s next to the hospital．)
(3)T shows the picture of the “Let's talk”.
T：“Is it far from here?” pointing to a place.
Ss:“No．”(No，it's not far)
(5)Listen to tape, and play in roles.
(6)Write the 4-skilled sentences.
Pronunciation
(1)Listen to the tape and read after it.
(2)Read and match
Let's sing
“Where Are You Going?'’
五.Homework
Write a passage about your ideal city.
六.Teaching note:
课后反思
第三课时
一、Teaching aims:
1． 能够理解并会朗读Let's read部分的对话；能完成排序练习。（www.61k.com)
2． 能够使学生简单了解中、西方地图不同的标识。
二、Teaching importance and difficulties
1.The dialogues in the Let’s read.
2．New sentences: What are you going to do after school? Get off at the cinema．Then walk straight for three minutes．
三、Preparations:
1．Tape, tape-recoder
2．The pictures of Let's read and Good to know.
四、Procedures:
1．Warm-up
(1)Sing the song: “Where Are You Going?'’
(2)Greeting
T：How do you go to school?
S：I usually go to school by bike．
2． Preview
(1)一组根据教师的描述绘制地图。比一比，选出正确无误的地图，并评出最佳“搭档”。
(2)学生做活动手册A Let's talk部分的配套练习。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(3)学生听、读A Let's tall部分，并抄写四会句子。
(4)学生跟录音学唱歌曲“Where Are You Going?'’
(5)学生仿照Let's chant替换关键词语自编歌谣。
T：Where is your home?
Ss：It's near ?．
3．Presentation
Let's read
(1)T:“School is over.I want to buy a pair of shoes after school.”
10
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
T：“What are you going to do after school?”
Ss: “1 want to?”
Explain the “going to?”
(2)教师在黑板上画一张街区图，图中有各种不同的建筑，如：医院、邮电局、鞋店、书店、图书馆、超市、电影院和学校。[www.61k.com)教师手指黑板上的街区图，告诉学生自己所处的位置，然后提问，如："Where is the hospital／post office??Is it far from here?”等。学生抢答：“It's next to the?”可以分组比赛，也可以全班学生一起参与抢答，答对者予以鼓励。
(3)教师在街区图的学校和鞋店旁边分别加上一个站牌说
“This is a bus stop.You can take the No．301 bus here．”教师继续利用街区图指出自己所在的位置：
“Now I am at the school．I want to buy a pair of shoes．How Can I get to the shoe store?'学生会回答“You can go by the No．301 bus．”教师继续提问：
“Where can I get off the bus?”一边问一边手指着shoe store的位置，提示学生回答：“Get off at the shoe store．”
(4)教师指着街区图继续提问：
“Now I'm at the shoe store．How can I get to the??” 根据地图所示选择离鞋店最近的直行可到的建筑物提问，引导学生回答：You Can go straight ahead．”教师表示肯定，说：“Yes! I can walk straight．”继续问学生：
“Is it far from the shoe store?”学生回答：“No．”教师接下来说：
Yes．It's not far．I walk straight for three minutes．Then I Can get to the?．”
(5)教师请学生阅读对话，回答以下问题：
What is Mike going To do? What is he going to buy?
Where is he going? Where is the shoe store?
Which bus Can he take? Is the hospital On the right or left side Of the road?
(6)学生课堂上完成排序任务。
(7)教师放Let's read部分的录音，学生跟读。
(8)学生两人一组分角色朗读对话。
Good to know
(1)教师出示Good to know部分的教学挂图，让学生知道如何使用地图以及要注意的四个标识：1．The title 2．North pointer 3．Symbols 4．Scale。
(2)教师出示杭州、上海或者当地的城区图，请学生找出一些地名并判断距离的远近。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生做A Let's read部分的活动手册配套练习。 。
(2)学生听A Let's read部分的录音并跟读，然后读给朋友或家长听。
课后反思：
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读四个方位词：south，east，west，north。
2． 能够听、说、读、写短语：turn left，turn right，go straight。
3． 能够听、说、认读句型：
“How can I get to the museum ?Go straight for five minutes. Then turn left．”并能进行关键词的替换操练。
4． 能够理解Story time的故事。
二、教学重、难点分析
1.本课时的教学重点是掌握四会短语：turn left, turn right, go straight.
2.本课时的教学难点是straight的发音和拼写。
11
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
三、教学准备
1.教师和学生准备B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。[www.61k.com］
2.教师准备录音机、本课时的录音带和教学挂图。
3.教师准备一面小红旗。
4.教师准备一张中国地图和一张杭州西湖的风景图。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
教师准备“兔子舞”的录音带。师生温习一下第一单元的“兔子舞”，跳的时候要注意强调单词left和right，师生一起跳一跳、乐一乐。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)“滚雪球”游戏
教师将有关公共场所的单词卡片贴在黑板上，第一名学生说一句话，如：I
can see a hospital．第二名学生在后面加上一词，如：“I can see a hospital and a cinema．，，每名学生都要比前面学生说的多加一个地点名词，这样依次进行.
(2)学生两人一组进行问答操练，如：Where is the?? It's?Is it far from here?
(3)教师检查A部分要求四会掌握的单词的拼写。
三、课前准备
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's learn I
(1)教师伸出两只手介绍说：“This is my left hand and this is my right hand．”请两名学生分别站在自己两侧介绍说：“A is on the left．B is on the right．”然后提问一学生：“Where is A／B?”引导学生回答：“?is on the left／right．
(2)教师给自己发指令并做动作：Turn left．Turn right．Go straight ahead．
(3)“西蒙说”游戏
(4)教师用简笔画
Let's play
教师准备一面彩旗和一块蒙眼布。将学生分成两大组，各组选派一名代表到上面。表示太阳慢慢从东方升起，教学east，要求学生注意ea字母组合的发音，提醒学生发音要到位。
(5)教师出示杭州西湖的图片或照片，让学生猜测：“Where is it?”然后展示短语卡片学west。教师示范朗读，学生跟读。
(6)教师将课前准备的中国地图贴在黑板上介绍：
“Tibet is in the west of China．Zhejiang is in the east of China．”教师边说边标出east和west，然后提问：“Where is Xiniiang?”教学north，教师领读该词，学生跟读，注意th字母组合的发音。教师再以同一方法教学south。教师发指令，请学生根据地图上“上北、下南、左西、右东”的方向标，听指令快速指方向，看谁反应快。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(7)“听一听、排一排”活动
每名学生拿出五张表场所的单词卡片，具体是哪五张卡片由教师指定。学生听教师发指令排出正确的位置，如教师可说：
“The post office is west of the library．The cinema is east of the library．”等。此活动也可以在小组内进行，鼓励学生人人参与。
(8)教师出示museum的单词卡片，说：
“1 want to get to the museum．Where is the Museum ?How can I get t0 the museum?”教师板书：“How can I get to the museum?”示范朗读，学生跟读。
(9)教师放B Let's learn部分的录音，让学生认读单词并回答问题。
(10)教师出示本部分单词卡片，给学生10～15秒时间熟悉卡片，然后将单词盖上，学生以四人小组为单位看图抢读抢拼单词，拼读时小组成员可提供帮助。
(11)教师可让学生在学生卡片背面的灰体词上描红，边描边拼读该单词或短语，看谁描得既快又好。前面来，其中一人发指令，另一人将彩旗插在正确的位置(插彩旗人的眼睛蒙上布)。如果插得不对，组内成员可以提醒，如：West!East!Left!Right!但提醒的次数不能超过三次。插对一次得一分，最后看谁的得分高，谁就是胜利者。
12
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)“优秀连队”活动
教师将学生分成4～6组，每组推荐一人当小军官，给组内成员发指令，如：
“Turn right !Turn left!Go straight!”根据整组学生的表现选出优秀连队。[www.61k.com）
(2)教师先做示范，然后引导学生编歌谣如：Left hand，left hand，show me your left hand．Right foot，right foot，stamp your right foot?
(3)Story time
全班学生听Story time部分的录音，教师讲解故事内容，学生模仿跟读。教师让学生读一遍故事后回答相关的问题。学生分别说一说从故事中学习到了什么经验。
(4)学生完成B Let's learn部分活动手册的配套练习。
(5)学生抄写本部分的四会短语。
教学反思：
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读句子：“It’s east of the cinema．Turn left at the cinema，then go straight．It's on the left．”并能在情景中进行运用。
2． 能够四会掌握句子：Turn left at the cinema，
then go straight?It's on the left。
3． 能够根据Let's try和Let's check部分的录音选出正确答案。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时的教学重点和难点是使学生掌握句型：
“It's east of the cinema ?Turn left the cinema，
then go straight．It’s on the left．，并能在情景中熟练运用所学对话。还要能够正确书写其中的四会掌握句型：Turn left at the cinema，then go straight ’。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
2． 教师准备本课时的教学挂图。
3． 教师和学生准备本课时的单词卡片。
4． 教师准备Wu Yifan和Amy的头饰。
5． 学生两人一组准备一张中国地图。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)“寻宝藏”活动
教师课前为每名学生准备一张相同的迷宫图。请学生根据教师的描述应的路线，如果标对了，他们将会得到“宝藏”。该活动也可以在两人组内进行。
(2)教师可适当修改刚才的寻宝藏路线图，引导学生依照新路线编对话并进行演示。
2．预习(Preview)
教师放录音，让学生按照录音内容选择正确的答案，对本单元的重要语言进行阶段性评价。 录音内容如下： ．
① Boy： Where is the library，please?
Girl： It's not flar．You can gO there by the No．18 bus?
⑦ Boy：How canI gettOthe cinema，please?
Woman：
Turn left from here．Then walk straight for 15 minutes．It's On the left ④ Girl： Where is the library，please?
Man： It'snexttothepost office．
13
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
④ Gid： Excuse me，how can I get tO the science museumf
Boy：Take the No：15 bus．Get off at the science museum?You carl see lt‘
(1)Let's try
录音内容如下：
Boy： Excuse me，how Can I get t0 the science museum'?
Girl：Take the No．t2bus．Get off at the hospital．Then walk east for lO You can see the science museum．It's next t0 the cinema?
Boy：Thank you．
Girl： You're welcome．
(2)教师再放Let's时部分的录音，学生跟读。(www.61k.com］
(3)教师指导学生根据文字提示选出正确的路线。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)教师将Let's talk部分的教学挂图贴在黑板上说
“1 want t0 go to the post office。。
Where is the post office?”引导学生回答：“It's east／west／south／
north of?。?
接着让学生看挂图，利用图上出现的场所替换关键词进行问答。 ?
(2)“爱我中华”活动
学生两人一组准备一张中国地图，进行问答，如：“Where is Jiangxi?It's east 0fHunan．It's west of Zhejiang．It's south of Anhui．It's north of Guangdong．”等。
(3)教师将学生分成六组，仿照教学挂图所示位置，把六张单词卡片
(hospital， bookstore，park，post office，cinema，sch001)分发给各组，然后教师站在图中Amy的位置上，说：I want to go to the hospital．Where is it?”学生会说：“It's east of the park．'’教师再问：“How can I get there?”引导学生说：“Turn left affil the cinema，
and go straight．Then turn right at the post office and go straight-It's on the left．”学生跟读并进行一系列的替换练习。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(4)教师放B Let's talk部分的录音，学生跟读。
(5)学生两人一组，看地图，替换句型中的关键词自编对话，请几组学生表演
对话。
(6)教师引导学生书写四会句型。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
学生做小组练习，再叫几名学生描述某一场所的位置，全班学生一起猜。
学生完成本单元B Let's talk部分活动手册配套练习，并抄写四会句子。
学生听B部分Let's talk的对话，读给家长或同伴听。
学生吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣并用录音机录下来。
教学反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够理解并会朗读Let's read部分，能够完成选词填空练习。
2． 能够完成Task time的任务。
3． 能写简单的路线说明并了解写信的基本格式。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时的教学重点和难点是能够听、说、认读句子：“Start from the bus stop .Get off
14
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
Of our school．Take the No．17 bus．Get off at the post office．Walk east for three minute.Find the white building On the left．Look for me near the door．
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。［www.61k.com)
2． 教师准备本课时的教学挂图。
3． 教师准备一张邀请卡。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)师生共唱歌曲“Ten Little Candles Dance．”
(2)“优秀小警察”活动 。
教师将B Let's talk部分的教学挂图贴在黑板上说：“1 want to buy some books? Where can I go? How Can I get there?'’请学生扮演小警察指路。师生一起评选出优秀小警察并给予奖励。
2．预习(Preview)
师生进行日常会话。以下问题可供参考：
How old are you? How d0 you go to school?
Which bus do you take? Where is your home?
What's the colour of the building you live in?
3．新课导入(Presentation)
(1)教师课前安排一名学生站在教室外面充当邮递员，上课铃响后，邮递员敲门递给教师一封信说：“There is a letter for you．”教师接过信，看了看信封说：“This letter is from Sarah．”然后从信封中取出一张邀请卡，说：“It’s an invitation．What does it say?”教师请学生粗读段落，回答该问题。
(2)教师出示教学挂图说“Yes,Look !It's Sarah's birthday．How old is she? Where is her home ?How Can we get to her home? Let's read again．”让学生带着问题阅读对话，提出不懂的单词或句子，教师答疑。
(3)“过三关”活动
教师朗读Let's read部分，朗读时故意读错三处，请学生看课文听教师朗读，听到错误及时指出。如果所出现的三处错误没有被学生发现，则表明教师已闯过三关。
(4)教师指导学生完成选择填空。 j
(5)教师要求学生根据Sarah信中的说明，画出到她家的路线图。比一比谁画得既快又好。
(6)教师事先准备课文当中指示路径的六个句子，随意打乱顺序，要求学生正确排序，看哪一组排得既快又准确。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)Task time
教师引导学生仔细看Task time中的地图，观察各处场所的位置以及公交车路线。然后让学生两两分组依照对话泡中的示范语言询问和回答某场所的位置以及到达该场所的路线。教师可适当提示学生图中交通指示灯四周的场所都可步行到达；而museum和hospital则可乘一一路公共汽车到达。
(2)学生听录音、跟读本课的目标语言。
教学反思：
15
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
Unit 3 教案
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读句型：“What are you going to do this evening?
I'm going to the cinema．”并能对其中的动词和时间短语进行替换操练。（www.61k.com）
2．能够听、说、认读动词短语：take a trip，go to the cinema，read a magazine．
3．能够听、说、读、写时间短语：next week，this morning／afternoon／evening；并能够听、说、认读时间短语：tomorrow，tonight．
4．能够在Pair work中合理安排自己的活动时间并与他人进行交流。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是能够听、说、读、写Let's learn部分的四会短语；并能替换 going to do句型中的动词和时间短语对将来的活动进行表述。
2．本课时的教学难点也是四会词汇的听、说、读、写以及对be going to do句型了解和替换操练。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备动词短语卡片，如：take a trip，go to the cinema等。
2． 教师准备Let's start部分的教学挂图。
3． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师课前放本单元歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”学生初步感知be to do句型。
(2)师生进行日常会话，可将重点放在动词短语的问答上，如：
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师出示课前准备好的课程表，说“Look! We have so many classes in a指着
Monday说：“What classes do we have on Mondays?'’帮助学生一起说“On Mondays，we have English，Chinese，math．?”再请学生回答其他几个的课安排。
(2)教师出示当天的日历，师生进行问答
(3)“演一演、猜一猜”活动
教师准备好动词短语卡片，如：play spots，go hiking，dO morning exercises． ‘the cinema，take a trip，read a magazine等以及相关道具，如电影票、杂志、 背包、太阳帽等。生抽出一张卡片，根据上面的图片或文字，用动作表现出来，其他学生猜什么短语。当有学生抽到新短语read a magazine时，教师可引他借助杂志来进行表演，其他学生由此可能会猜：read a book，教师借机引入新词magazine。教师可将take a trip留到最后自己表演，借助背包、太阳帽产生可能会猜出是go hiking，教师说：“No，
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
I'm going to take a trip．，’引出新短语take atrip。 教师可设立“最佳表演奖”来鼓励学生进行创造性表演，也可设立；‘心有灵 犀奖”来鼓励学生踊跃竞猜。
(4)教师放课文的录音，学生静听一遍后跟读，(教师可对‘I’m going to the cinema．”加以解释，语法规则见教学参考资料库。)随后学生两人一组进行练习，教师引导他们主动替换对话中的时间和动词短语，进行更为广泛的操练。
Pair work
教师出示Pair work部分的表格，说：
Look!Here are some activities that are good for you．Please decide when you are going to do them and tell your partner．Pay attention：
You can do them in two weeks．
学生先在表格中填人时间短语，然后进行结对操练。教师请几组学生演示对话。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生抄写本课时的四会词汇。
16
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(2)学生以表格形式安排自己第二天的活动并向朋友或家人介绍。［www.61k.com]
(3)学生跟录音学唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”
(4)学生做本部分活动手册的配套练习。
课后反思：
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求
1.能够听、说、读、写句型：
What are you going to do on the weekend? I'm going to visit my grandparents this weekend．
2.能在Group work部分合理安排周末的旅游项目。
3.能够完成Let's try部分听录音判断对错的练习。
4.能够听懂、会唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”
二、教学重、难点分析
1.本课时的教学重点是学生能准确、自如地运用(并会书写)be going to do句型描述自己的活动计划与他人进行交流。
2．本课时的教学难点是听、说、读、写四会掌握句型：What are you going to do on the weekend ?I'm going to visit my grandparents this weekend．
三、课前准备
1．教师准备一张简明地图，图中标有ZOO，theme park，cinema，school，bookstore，post office，pet shop等场所。
2．教师准备一张当地的简明旅游图。
3．学生以四人为一小组准备当地的简明旅游图。
4．教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1) 教师课前放歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”
(2)学生根据自己设计的表格向其他学生介绍自己一天的活动安排.
2． 预习＼Preview Let' try
教师说：
“The National Day is coming．I have a friend in Shanghai．What is she going to do? Let's listen to the tape and find out．”教师可分三次放录音，并根据学生的际情况有针对性地提问。学生听录音、回答问题并完成判断正误的练习。可供考的问题如下(!)Where is she going ②How is she going there? ③
Who is she going with? Is she happy? ⑤What is she going to buy?
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's sing
教师接着Let's try部分说：
The girl is going to Be doing on the National Day．She's very happy．Now let's listen to a song and find out what the children are going to do on Saturday. OK? 教师放C部分的歌曲，学生跟唱两遍后分师生、男女生或在小组间展开对唱。
Let's talk
(1)对唱结束后，教师出示标有动物园、电影院等地点的简明地图，并圈出动 园所在位置，说：“The boy／girl(根据歌曲录音中的声音)is going to ZOO．His／
her home is here．(教师指着地图中离动物园较远的某一地
点)Is it far from the zoo?”学生回答：“Yes，it is far from the zoo．'教师再问：“How can he／she get to the zoo?”引导学生回答：“By bike／bus／taxi．”等。
(2)教师放Let's talk部分的录音，学生跟读并分角色朗读。学生开展组与组之间的朗读比赛，教师鼓励学生对对话中的时间和地点进行替换。
17
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(3)教师出示打乱顺序的单词卡片，如：what ,do，going，are, the，to，you，weekend. 又如：I，going，visit，to，am，my，this，grandparents，weekend。（www.61k.com)要求学生在最快时间内组合成句。师生一起拼读其中较难的单词如：weekend，grandparents，visit。
(4)教师引导学生书写四会句型。
Group work
教师出示当地旅游图，师生可先就旅游景点自由会话，如：
“Where is it ? How do you go there?”等。
然后教师布置任务
Now you are a tour guide．Please write a schedule for this weekend．
See who can design the best schedule for us．
学生先在课文表格中写出自己的活动设计，并在小组内进行表述。组内推选出一 名“最佳小导游”，如果时间允许还可举行全班性的比赛。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生朗读本课时的对话。
(2)学生抄写四会句子。
(3)学生对自己的周末活动做出详细安排，并以表格形式写出。
(4)学生将本单元的歌曲唱给家人或朋友听并录音．
(5)学生做本课时的活动手册配套练习。
课后反思：
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够读懂Let's read中的段落，并根据段落内容写出提纲式的
LiuYun's weekend plan.
2． 能够模仿文段内容陈述自己的周末活动安排。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是阅读段落并根据段落内容进行第三人称的转述，掌握第三人 称吋be going to do句型的用法。
2． 本课时的教学难点是转述时第一人称与第三人称的人称代词与物主代词的变换。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备若干张表格(形式见教学过程说明)。
2． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师课前放学生录制的本单元歌曲的录音，全班一起欣赏并评一评谁白
最动听。
(2)师生同唱歌曲“What Are You Going to Do?”
(3)教师出示第二课时中the Great Wall，theme park和当地部分名胜及各种如
bookstore，pet shop的图片(包括生词supermarket)。先请一名学生示范问答，如：
What are you going to do this morning ?I'm going to visit the Great Wall．How do you get there? By train．?教师鼓励学生踊跃提问，而非师生间单向问答。
2． 预习(Preview)
教师请几名学生介绍自己的周末安排。在学生介绍的过程中，教师可根据提出更细节性的问题，姐
“When are you going to get up on Saturday? Where are you going on Saturday morning ?How are you going to the zoo?”等。在一名学生答之后，教师给予评价，如：“Wonderful !You're going to have a busy weekend，are you?”等，并向其他学生提问：“What is A going to do on Saturday morning? he is going with?”等，引导学生
18
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
将第一人称改为相应的第三人称进行回答， 生回答的内容以短语形式填人课前准备好的表格中.完成表格后，教师说： “Amy is going to have a busy weekend．”板书have：weekend，引导其他学生以“I'm going to have a busy weekend．”为开头介绍周末安排，并邀请其他学生做简单记录，对于其中涉及的非四会词汇或其他的词汇可师生一起拼写。（www.61k.com)
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)在几名学生汇报完周末活动安排后，教师广泛而快速地询问其他学生：
What are you going to do on Saturday／Sunday morning?”等，确认学生能正确使用句型：“I'm going to?”来回答。
(2)教师接下来说“Liu Yun is going to have a busy weekend，
too．What is she going to do? Please read the passage and answer my questions．”教师可以根据段落内容 顺序设计问题，让学生朗读一遍课文后依次口头回答。
(3)学生以小组为单位讨论并回答问题，如有不同答案，师生共同探讨，找出最佳答案。
(4)教师放课文录音，学生跟读两遍后全班一起朗读，再自由朗读课文l一2遍。
(5)学生独立填充Liu Yun's Weekend Plan，并在组内互相讨论，交流与校对。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生模仿跟读Let's read的录音，并把自己的朗读录音后交给教师。
(2)学生模仿课文表述自己的周末活动安排。
(3)学生做本部分活动手册的配套练习。
课后反思：
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读单词或词组：dictionary，post card，newspaper，magazine，comic book；并能够书写post card；newspaper和comic book。
2．能够听、说、认读句子：
“What are you going to do? I'm going to buy an English book in the bookstore．When are you going? This afternoon．”并能进行关键词的替换练习。
3．能够用所学句型“What are you going to buy? I'm going to buy?”进行
Let's play部分的购物活动。
4。．能够听瞳并会吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。
5． 能够了解音标／a：／，／A／，／el，／O／，／m／，／n／，／o／的音和形并会朗读相关例词；能够完成Read and match部分看图、读音标、辨词形后连线的练习。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是听、说、读、写四会单词和短语。
2．本课时的教学难点是三会单词dictionary的发音、四会单词的拼写和
Pronunciation 部分字母组合th的两种发音。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备本课时的单词卡片及不同科目的课本，如：English book，Chinese．，。 等。
2． 教师请学生帮助，模仿Let's play部分的插图在课前对教室进行布置，准备一仑 架和5—6处“卖书点”。 錙
3． 教师自制Pronunciation部分的挂图，对折后在背面写上单词Dictionary。 硝
4． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)学生朗读Let's read的段落进行复习巩固。
(2)学生陈述上节课后模仿课文设计的周末活动安排，教师根据其陈述内容提问其他学生，如：“What is he going to do on Saturday morning?”请他们回答，如： is going to?．
19
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
2． 预习(Preview) Let's chant
(1)教师听完几名学生陈述后说：
What a nice weekend !Now let's listen to the music and try to find out what the child is going to do today．教师用幻灯片或投影片展示Let's chant的歌谣，然后放录音，学生看文字听，再跟节奏吟唱。(www.61k.com）
(2)教师可简单解释歌谣中学生初次接触的短语，如take a sleep。师生根据歌谣内容进行问答，如：Are you going to buy a book／bake a cake ?Yes，I am.
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's learn I
(1)教师继续Let's chant部分的提问："Are you going to buy a book，too?”在有生回答“Yes，I'm going to buy a book．”或“Yes，I am．”后教师再问：
“Where do you buy a book?”学生回答：“In a bookstore．”
(2)教师接着提问：“What books can you buy in a bookstore?'’启发学生回忆学过的书籍词汇，如：English book，Chinese book，math book，music book，science book等，学生回答出一种书，教师即出示一本该书的实物，把它们一一放在书架上，师生一起拼写这些单词。 ．
(3)教师可通过继续出示实物的方式，依次呈现生词：comic book，
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
dictionary， newspaper，post card，也可通过与story-book的比较呈现comic book；还可用简单的英语进行解释，请学生猜是哪个生词，如：“Dictionary：
In this kind of book。we can find many new words．It is helpful to us．Post card：When New Year's Day is coming，we often send them to our friends．”在呈现过程中，师生一起拼读生词中的四会单词。
(4)学生进行单词拼写比赛，可以口头进行；还可利用单词卡片背面的灰体词进行描红比赛，学生边描边拼读，看谁既快又好，以帮助记忆本课时四会单词。
Let's play
教师布置学生课前每人带2—3本图书并布置好5—6处“卖书点”(仿照课文Let's play中的插图)。每处“卖书点”由2—3名学生担任销售人员，其他学生自由购书。教师先与学生进行示范对话，可结合前几册学生用书中所学有关购物的句型对对话进行拓展．
卖出书本最多的学生获“最佳营销员”奖，其他学生每人至少购得2—3本图书。教师在学生活动过程中应注意观察，随时发现有创造性对话并及时鼓励有出色表现的学生。 Let's learnⅡ
教师放Let's learn部分的录音，学生跟读后对其中的书籍名词和时间短语进行替换练习。 Pronunciation
(1)教师出示对折后写有Dictionary字样的Pronunciation部分的挂图说：
Look!I have a dictionary．You Can find many new words in it．Can you read them?教师呈现Pronunciation部分的音标和单词，放录音，让学生仔细听，感知音标的音与形。然后教师示范朗读，学生跟读。尤其是th的两种发音，教师应请学生仔细对照口型模仿朗读。
(2)Read and match
学生跟读录音2—3遍后独立完成连线练习。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生抄写本课时四会词汇。
(2)学生朗读Pronunciation部分的例词，并试着找出更多的例词，同学之间剞
交流。
(3)学生听录音吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。
(4)学生做活动手册本部分的配套练习。
课后反思：
20
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读what，where，when引导的特殊疑问句并能做出相应回答。(www.61k.com)
2． 能够听、说、读、写四会句子：Where are you going this aftenoon? I'm going bookstore．What are you going to buy ?I am going to buy a comic book．
3． 能够听懂Let's try部分的对话并完成听音选图的练习。
4． 能够使用各种疑问句釆访他人的活动安排并做记录。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是三个特殊疑问句的问与答以及各种信息的替换和交流。
2． 本课时的教学难点是学生能运用what，where，when疑问句进行真实的交际以工 组四会句型的正确书写。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备一张简明地图，标出bookstore，shoe store，fruit stand，pet shop等场所。
2． 教师准备各商店所出售的货物的小卡片。
3． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
4． 教师课前在黑板上画出下列表格：
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)全班一起吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
(2)单词拼写竞赛
要拼写的单词包括：this morning／afternoon／evening，next week，newspaper， postcard等。可采取小组合作的“接龙式”拼写形式；也可以选取组内一名学生拼写全部单词。拼出单词最快最多的组获胜。
(3)教师出示简明地图，师生问答如下：
r：Whatshopisit?
s：It's a bookstore．
r：What can you buy in the bookstore?
s： ?
在学生回答各商店所出售的物品时，教师根据其回答贴出物品的小卡片，如：
Fruit stand：orange，apple，pear，banana?．Shoe store：sneakers，sandals，boots?．(此时可引导学生说“a pair of sneakers／boots'’等)
2． 预习(Preview)
Let's try
教师指着地图中的商店及各商店所出售的物品说：Look!There are so many stores and so many goods．Let's listen to the tape and find out：①
Where is Sarah going? ②What
is she going to buy? ③Who is she going with?
教师放三遍Let's try部分的录音，以上问题可根据学生的实际情况分三次提出，直 到多数学生能回答并能将前两项答案填人教师课前画出的表格中。在填表过程中，教师请学生一起拼写其中的四会单词，如：bookstore，comic book。
3。 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's talk
(1)“我的购物计划”活动
教师指着黑板上的简明地图及表格说：Look，
Sarah and Chen J1e are going t(bookstore．Where are you going? What are you going to buy? When are you go Please write a shopping plan．指导学生结合表格中的购物地点、时间及商品三项提示，根据自己的购物；制定一个购物计划，组内学生可以互相交流讨论。
学生做好计划后，师生根据表格中的三点要求：where，what，when进行提问。
教师先与几名学生进行上述对话，再由学生提问来获知教师的购物计划由学生将有关信
21
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
息填人表格中。（www.61k.com） 学生两人一组互相丫解对方的shopping plan，灵活运用where，when，what导的三个疑问句互相提问和回答。
(2)教师放课文的录音，学生静听后跟读，再分角色朗读。
(3)学生两人一组根据课本上的替换图对对话中的各种信息进行替换，教师文指导，并请几组学生进行示范。
(4)教师引导学生进行四会句子的书写。
Pair work
(1)学生两人一组相互采访，根据表格中提供的三个疑问句了解同伴当天下午活动安排(不一定是购物)，并简要记录信息。
(2)教师请几组学生在班级内演示采访过程。教师可对采访者的采访记录进行调查和评价，也可在不同桌的学生之间展开互评。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生抄写本课时的四会句子。
(2)学生课后对父母或朋友的近期活动进行采访，记录结果并录音，把文字及料以及录音材料交给教师。
(3)学生吟唱本单元的歌谣，录音后与录音带进行比较，不断改进语音语调。
课后反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话。
2． 能够根据对话内容回答文后的问题。
3。 能够就自己20年后的理想状况进行讨论。
4． 能够理解Good to know部分的内容。
5． 能够完成Let's check部分听音选图的练习。
二，教学重、难点分析
本课时的教学重点和难点是听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备各种职业的单词卡片，如：soldier，doctor，nurse，farmer，English teacher， Chinese teacher，science teacher等。
2。 教师准备关于文字记载方式的发展演变的图片或影视资料片．
3． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)师生一起吟唱Let's chant部分的歌谣。
(2)教师出示各种职业的单词卡片，与学生进行问答：“What is he／she? He’s／ She's a doctor．”等。教师把职业单词写在黑板上。
2． 预习(Preview)
．Task time
(1)教师指着黑板上各种职业的单词说： “Everyone has a dream．What are you going to be in the future? Discuss with your partner．”引导学生使用“I'm going
to be a?”进行分组讨论，教师指导并适当记录学生的讨论情况。
(2)教师与学生快速问答，如：
r：What are you going to be one day?
s：I'm going to be a teacher．
22
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
r：Oh，you want to be a teacher．(每项问答后教师都用这句话做总结，也可逐 步引导学生使用句型“1wanttObe?”进行回答。（www.61k.com))
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let"s read
(1)教师进行总结说：“You're great．You have many wonderful dreams．Sarah has a wonderful dream ,too．What is she going to be one day? What is she going to do this weekend? Let's read a dialogue．”学生仔细阅读对话，教师走动答疑。
(2)教师请学生简要回答刚才提出的两个问题，如：
“A science teacher．Plant trees．” 然后师生间自由会话：
“Do you want to be a science teacher?'’教师根据学生的回答继续提问：
“Do you like plants ?Are you going to plant any~ees?”教师作出思考的表情，停顿一下说：“What else? Let me see．?”然后做出想起千千冬：
的样子，问：
“Are you going to read any magazines about plants?Do you need magazines about plants?'’教师板书a magazine about patoto师生自由会话后一起朗读文后提出的问题，学生再带着问题默读或朗读对蟧；同桌之间或组内同学可以互相讨论问题的答案并在横线上书写答句。
(4)教师请学生回答问题，全班进行核对。教师提醒学生注意拼写准确、书写规范。
(5)教师放课文的录音，学生跟读后全班一起朗读，然后分角色朗读。
Good to know
教师引入该部分教学：
Some of you want to be Chinese teachers．So you should know something about the history Of Chinese writing．教师借助资料片介绍该部分，扩充学生的知识面。
4． 巩固和延伸 (Consolidation and extension)
(1)Story time
教师说：Zoom has a dream，
Let's watch the VCD．too．He wants tO learn how tO swim．How does he learn? 教师放Story time的VCD(也可以呈现挂图并放故事的录音)。学生观看后讨
论故事的涵义，体会“Learn by doing．”的道理。
(2)Let's check
教师放该部分录音，学生听录音选出正确选项。
课后反思：
Recycle 1 教案
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读Let's read I部分的对话并能完成文后判断正误的练习。
2．能够根据Let's find out的提示语言在地图中找到并写出对应的公共场所。
3．能够听懂、会唱歌曲“How Can I Get to the Zoo?'’
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是第一、二单元主要语言的巩固和拓展。
2．本课时的教学难点是Let's find out部分根据提示语言在地图上确认并书写相应 公共场所。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备一张标有post office，pet shop，hospital，park，ZOO等场所的简明地图。
2．教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)全班一起吟唱第一单元Let's chant的歌谣。
23
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(2)师生进行自由会话：How do you go to school ? I go by?
(3)教师用红笔在简明地图上标出某一地点，如：A，说：
“Now we are here．can I get to the park／cinema／pet shop?”请学生一边指地图，一边说明路。[www.61k.com］如：“Go straight．It's next to the post office．”教师还可标出其它地点，如B等，请学生指路。
2．预习(Preview)
教师手指简明地图上的某一地点，说：
“Now we're here．We're going to the park．Is it far from here?”引导学生根据地图上的距离回答。教师继续提问：“How can we go to the park?”学生可提出不同建议，如：“We can go by bike／bus．等。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s read
(1)教师说：
“Amy and Chen Jie are going to the park ,too．How do they go to the park? Let's read the dialogue．”教师引导学生阅读对话，回答问题。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(2)教师用幻灯或实物投影呈现Let's read I对话下面判断正误的练习。师生一起朗读问题，让学生打判断正误，再朗读对话或听录音，校对答案。
(3)学生自由朗读或分组分角色朗读本部分对话。
Let's find out
(1)在学生分组朗读后，教师说：
Amy and Chen Jie are in the park now．The park has a pet shop，
an ice—skating area and a ping-pong area．What else? Let's read and find out．教师指导学生阅读文中的指示语言，并确定平面图的四个方向，学生独立或两人一组讨论完成填图练习。
(2)师生以对话形式来核对答案。
Let's sing
(1)教师说：“The park is very interesting．Now let's go to the zoo．指着简明地图中的动物园，问：“It's far from the park．How can I get to the zoo?’请学生自由回答：“By bike／car?”
(2)教师放歌曲“How Can I Get to the Zoo?”学生看歌词静听，然后跟唱2～3遍。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生听录音，跟读本课时对话。
(2)学生进行课外讨论：How can we get to the zoo?
(3)学生跟录音唱歌曲“How Can I Get to the Zoo ?
五．课后反思
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听、说、认读Let's read II部分的对话并能完成对话后判断正误的练习。
2． 能够综合运用1～3单元的主要语言；能听懂Listen and choose部分的对话，看图选项的练习。
3． 能够熟练运用be going to do句型讨论自己的梦想之旅。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课时的教学重点是1～3单元的综合复习，尤其是复习巩固be going to do句型。
24
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
2． 本课时的教学难点是学生能够运用前三个单元的语言灵活有效地进行交流。(www.61k.com）
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备一张简明城市交通图和若干面小彩旗。
2． 学生课前对放学后的活动做出简单计划并进行表述。
3． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)全班齐唱歌曲“How Can I Get to the Zoo?'’
(2)学生四人一组分角色朗读Let's read I部分的对话。可根据朗读的流利程度语音语调的正确、优美程度展开评比。
2．预习(Preview)
“探路先锋”游戏
教师准备一张简明城市交通图(或教师自制简明地图)，以及若干面小彩旗。教出示交通图，在图中标出若干个地点，如A、B、C等，请两名学生到地图前，持一面彩旗。教师给出指示语，如：“I'm at Point A，
I go straight from A．Then turn left at the traffic lights．Where am I?”教师的指示语应清晰、准确，可由简至难步步推进。能够率先将彩旗贴至教师所述位置的为“探路先锋”，教师给予奖励。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)“我是实习小交警”活动
教师准备一张简明城市交通图和一顶交警帽。学生两人一组，分别扮演交警与问路者，可进行如下对话：
A：Good morning，sir_ Where is the post office，please?
B：Go straight．Turn right at the hospital．It's On the left．?
A：Thank you．
若问路者及其他学生能根据“交警”的指示语顺利找到目的地，则“实习”小交警晋升为“正式”小交警，教师颁发给交警袖章或其他奖励品。
(2)教师说：
“Now we know the city very well．I'm going to?this afternoon．Where are you going ?What are you going to do after school?”与学生展开如下对话：
T：What are you going to do after school?
S：I'm going to the?．
T：Where is the??
(3)Let's read II
教师可接着学生的回答提问：“What is A going to do this afternoon?”学生回答后，教师继续提问：
“What are Zhang Peng and Mike going to do this afternoon? Do you want to know? Let's read the dialogue．”教师指导学生仔细阅读对话，回答提出的问题。师生一起朗读对话后判断正误的句子。学生自由朗读或小组合作朗读对话，核对答案；或者学生听1～2遍录音后集体校对答案。
Listen and choose
教师接着Let's read部分说：
Zhang Peng and Mike have their plans．Now let's listen and find out what John and Wu Yifan are going to do this afternoon．
教师放三遍录音，第一遍请学生静听，初步理解；第二遍请学生听音选图；第三遍请学生进行自我检查。
如果时间允许，也可要求学生最后跟读一遍录音。
(4)Group work
学生分组讨论自己想象中的假期并填写该部分表格。教师可鼓励学生课后将自己的梦想之旅写成短文(连贯的3～4个句子即可)参加评比，师生一起评选出七副作品在班级内展示。
25
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
4．巩固和延伸(consolidation and extension)
(1)学生朗读Let's read II部分的对话。（www.61k.com)
(2)学生书写并修改有关My Dream Vacation，的段落，交给教师进行评选。
(3)学生做活动手册的配套练习。
五．课后反思
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够进一步综合运用l～3单元的主要语言进行有实际交际意义的会话；能够听懂Listen and match的对话并完成连线练习。
2．能够理解并会吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
3．能够认读l～3单元Pronunciation的音标并能把音标和相关例词正确连线。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是学生对前三个单元主要语言的正确理解和有效运用。
2．本课时的教学难点是音标部分，要综合复习前三单元学过的音标，使学生能把音标和相关单词正确连线。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备前三个单元所学音标的卡片。
2．教师课前选一篇学生所做My Dream Vacation的短文，根据其内容仿照本课歌谣编创一首新歌谣。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
3． 教师准备录音机和本课时的录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(warm-up)
(1)全班齐唱歌曲“How call I Get to the Zoo?'’
(2)师生一起吟唱第一单元的歌谣，要求学生一边吟唱，一边用手打节拍。
2．预习(Preview)
教师对学生有关My Dream Vacation的短文做出总体评价，并请几名写得有创意的学生朗读他们的短文，教师针对其内容提问，如：
“Where are you going? What are you going to do? How are you going to there等。教师根据课前的准备，在最后一名学生朗读完文章并回答了问题以后，简化并板书该学生的回答，将其改编成为一首小歌谣，如：
Where are you going? What are you going to do?
I'm going to the ZOO to see the monkeys．
I'm going by bike．I'm going On foot．
I live near the ZOO．So I won't take a train．
教师拍节拍示范朗读自己改写的新歌谣，学生模仿吟唱新歌谣。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's chant
在以上活动的基础上，教师放Let's chant部分的录音，学生静听并试着跟读，再看着文字吟唱。师生可进行问答式吟唱，并在小组间展开比赛。
Listen and match
教师说：“Now let's时to find out：Where are John, Mike，
Chen Jie and Sarah going this weekend? How are they going ?Let's listen!”教师放三遍录音，第一遍请学生静听，初步理解；第二遍请学生听音选图；
Read and match
(1)“眼疾手快”游戏
教师准备前三单元的音标卡片，把它们贴在黑板上。教师把学生分成四大组，每组各
26
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
派一名代表上台，教师念出一个音标，最陕认出并将它拿到手里的学生获胜。（www.61k.com）最后拿到音标卡片最多的学生获胜。
(2)教师出示l～3单元Pronunciation部分某些例词的音标，请学生朗读。再让学生独立完成Read and match部分的练习，全班核对、打分，评选出得分最高的冠军。
4． 巩固和延伸(consolidation and extension)
(1)学生朗读l～3单元Pronunciation的音标和例词。
(2)学生跟录音吟唱Let's chant的歌谣。
(3)学生综合复习l～3单元的语言。
(4)学生做活动手册的配套练习。
五．课后反思
UNIT 4
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读句子：What is your hobby? I like collecting stamps?
2．能够听、说、读、写动词短语的ing形式：collecting stamps，riding a bike，diving playing the violin，making kites。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是掌握五个动词(短语)的ing形式。
2．本课时的教学难点是拼写：riding，diving，making。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。
2．教师准备A部分Let's learn的单词卡片。
3．教师准备一些树叶、一本集邮册、两只风筝。
4．学生准备A部分Let's learn的单词卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
教师放五年级下册Recycle 2的歌曲“I Love Going Hiking”，学生边唱边跟教师倘相应的动作。
2．预习(Preview)
“滚雪球”游戏
教师边出示各种形状的树叶，边说：“I like collecting leaves．”请一名学生在此去基础上再加一句话，如：“I like collecting leaves．I like taking pictures．依次类推，看谁说出的句子最多。
3.新课呈现(Presentation)
4.Let’s start
教师与一名学生示范。教师问：“What’s your hobby?”学生回答：
“Swimming. What about you?”教师回答后示范填写Let’s start部分的表格。同桌或前后两名学生之间进行问答、填表。
Let's learn
(1)教师边做动作边说自己的业余爱好：
“I like playing the violin．What is your hobby?”引导学生回答：“I like?”教师板书：What is your hobby? I like playing the violin．指导学生拼读hobby，playing the violin并进行问答操练。
27
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(2)教师拿出集邮册，从里面取出一张邮票，问学生：“What's this?”引导学生回答：“It's a stamp．”教师板书stamp并带读。（www.61k.com）教师展示集邮册，同时说：
“I like collecting stamps．”然后板书并带读collecting stamps。教师问：“Do you like collecting stamps?”，引导学生作答后拼读并操练：
I like collecting stamps．
(3)教师做骑自行车的动作，问：“What am I doing?”学生猜：“You’re?教师说：“Yes，I am riding a bike．I go to work by bike every day．I like riding a bike．教师板书：tiding a bike，指导学生拼读，告诉学生riding是tide去掉结尾不发音的e再加上ing。
(4)教师出示一只风筝，问：“What's this?”引导学生回答：“It's a kite．”教师出 示两只风筝，问：“What are they?”引导学生回答。接着教师做放风筝的动作，问：“What am I doing?”学生回答：“You’re flying a kite．”教师回答：“Yes，I like flying kites．I can make kites．I like making kites，too．”然后出示making kites的单词卡片，问：“What's he doing?”引导学生回答：
“He’s making kites．板书：making kites，学生拼读，注意making的拼写。
(5)教师出示diving的单词卡片，问：“What is he doing?”引导学生回答：
He's diving．教师板书：diving，学生拼读，注意diving的拼写。
(6)教师手指板书，学生齐拍手练习说句子，如：
What is your hobby? What is your hobby? Playing，playing，
I like playing the violin．Collecting，collecting，I like
collecting stamps．Riding，riding，I like riding a bike．Making，making，I like making kites．Diving，diving，I like diving．
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(7)教师放Let's learn部分的录音，学生跟读。教师出示 Let's learn部分的单词卡片，学生根据单词卡片内容进行问答操练：What is your hobby?I like--
(8)“猜一猜”游戏
学生拿出A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。同桌一组，每人抽出一张单词卡作为自己的爱好，一人猜：“You like?”另一名学生根据手中卡片上的内容回答：“Yes／
No．I like?”两人可进行积分比赛，猜对卡片上的内容就得到这张卡片，最后看谁手里的卡片最多。
Group work
学生带好纸笔在组内进行调查，互相询问：‘'．What is your hobby?'’调查完毕，各组派代表上台汇报调查结果：“?boys／girls like?”也可说出名字，如：“一
and?like?”若课上时间不够，可将调查活动放到课后进行，下一节课汇报，建议教师指导学生自己做个简单的调查表，边调查边填写表格。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)让学生做本单元A Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)让学生听Let's learn部分的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
(3)让学生背诵并抄写本课四会动词(短语)。
五．课后反思
28
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
第二课时
一．教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写句型：What's your hobby? I like collecting stamps．He likes collecting stamps，too．
2．能够认读音标：／3：／，／a／，／J、／，／3／，／l／，／r／，并能朗读Pronunciation部分例词。［www.61k.com］
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是句型：
What's your hobby? I like collecting stamps．He likes collecting stamps，too．
2．本课时的教学难点是在实际情景中正确运用句型：He／She likes?
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。
2．教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let's 1earn部分的单词卡片。
3．教师准备Pronunciation部分的挂图。
4．教师准备各种展览活动的海报，可参照A Let's talk部分的替换图，也可以自己带作一些图文并茂的海报。
5．教师准备一些名人照片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)连锁问答操练。教师对一名学生说：“I like?What's your hobby?”该学生回答后向别的学生提问，依次进行。
(2)教师出示A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let’s learn部分的单词卡片，同桌根据卡片开火车问答操练，如：What’s your hobby? I like?．
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师放A Let's learn部分的录音，学生跟读并拼读动词短语。
(2)“看谁反应快”游戏
教师请六名学生上台站成一排，每人手持一张A Let's learn部分的单词卡片一名学生首先用本部分的一张卡片上的短语说一个句子，如：I like diving．捉住有diving单词卡片的学生则立即向前迈一步根据其它五张卡片的内容说一个名子，如：
I like playing the violin．如果句子正确，则可以退回到原来位置，如果句子有误或反应慢就要退出游戏。做完一遍后教师可更换一些单词卡片，继续做游戏。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's try
学生听录音，做练习。
Let's talk
(1)(教师课前在教室的墙上贴上各种海报。)教师手指墙上画展的海报说：
“There is a painting show Saturday．I like painting．I am going to the show．What else likes painting? Who would like to go with me?”有学生举手，教师则手指该名学生说：“I like painting．He／She likes painting，too．”接着教师手指邮票展的海报说：“There is a stamp show Sunday．I like collecting stamps，too．Do you?”有学生举手，教师说：“He／She likes collecting stamps，too．”板书：
He likes collecting stamps，too．(板书likes中的s可以用不同颜色标出，以 出重
29
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
点。[www.61k.com］)学生跟读，然后开火车进行造句练习：He／She likes?
(2)教师放Let's talk部分的录音，学生跟读、分角色朗读。
(3)学生指着墙上的海报进行对话操练。
请同桌学生依次起立汇报：I like??likes?如果两人的爱好刚好相同，可以接着说，“We can go to the?show together．”教师及时指导、纠错。
(4)教师指导学生拼写四会句子。鼓励学生将上一步骤中的汇报内容记录下来。 Let's play
(1)教师请六、七名学生上台站成一排，第一名学生A向前迈出一步说：“I like?然后退回原处，第二名学生B迈出一步说：“A likes?I like?”，接下来第三名学生c迈出一步说：“A likes?B likes?I like?”，依次进行。
(2)教师用实物投影仪展示一些名人照片，如：运动员、歌唱家、收藏家等，生抢答：“He／She likes?”
“老师的爱好”游戏
教师将学生熟悉的六位教师的名字写在黑板上。全班学生分成六组，每组负责讲述其中的一位教师，抽签决定各组描述的对象。一组描述，其他的小组猜他描述的是哪位教师。要求首先要描述教师的爱好，如果其他小组猜不出，再继描述教师的体貌特征等，直到其他学生猜出教师名字为止。
Pronunciation
(1)教师出示Pronunciation部分的挂图，带领学生认读音标：／3：／，／3／，／1／，／r／。带读例词，指导学生归纳发音规律。学生听录音跟读。
(2)教师指导学生完成Read and match的练习。
(3)“摘星星”游戏
学生分成两队，每队站一列。教师在黑板上贴一颗大红星，依次出示单音节音标词的单词卡片，如：／si：／，／red／，／’sis饴／等，两队的第一名学生抢先起立读单词，最先拼出的学生得到一颗星，最后哪队得到的星星最多就可以赢得大红星。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)做本单元A Let's talk部分的活动手册配套练习。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(2)让学生听Let's learn，Let's talk部分的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
(3)让学生背诵并抄写本课四会句子。
五．课后反思
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读Let's read中的两封电子邮件。
2．了解一些有关英语信封书写的知识。 。
3．能够听懂、会唱歌曲“My Pen Pal"。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是阅读Let's read中的两封电子邮件。
2．本课时的教学难点是能理解、认读句子：
30
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
My twin sister Ann likes drawing picture and making kites．We look the same，but we don't like the same things．Tell me something about you．
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。[www.61k.com)
2．教师准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let's 1earn部分的单词卡片。
3．教师准备一个用汉语书写的信封与一个用英语书写的信封。
四，教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)上课前教师播放歌曲“My Pen Pal'’的录音，让学生跟录音轻声哼唱。
(2)教师放五年级下册第四单元B Let's chant部分的歌谣录音，学生听录音边动作边说唱歌谣。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师放A Let's learn和Let's talk部分的录音，学生跟读。
(2)教师出示A Let's learn部分和五年级下册第四、五、六单元Let's learn部分动作单词卡片，同桌开火车操练句型：What is your hobby? I like?
(3)“抢答”游戏
学生分成两组。每组轮流派一名代表上台抽卡片表演卡片上的动作，本组其他学用“He／She likes?”句型猜卡片上的内容，如果猜出就可以得分。两个小组轮流进行，最后看哪个小组得分最高。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)教师问：“Do you remember Dalin，Xiaolin，
Zhang Shu and Zhang Ren? They are twins．They look the same．Today，
you'll get to know two more twins．”然后教师拿出本部分的挂图，指着图画上的两个外国小姑娘说：
“Look at the two girl.This girl has long hair．That girl has long hair，too．This girl has big eyes．That girl has big eyes，
too．They look the same．What is she doing? She's drawing picture. What about the other girl? What is she doing? She's writing an e-mail．What are hobbies? Now let's read an e-mail．'’然后学生打开课本或看挂图仔细阅读第一封电子邮件。
(2)教师放本部分第一封电子邮件的录音，学生仔细听的同时再细读一遍电子邮件。然后教师说几个句子，请学生判断正误。
Liu Yun is Alice's new pen pal．
Alice likes swimming，diving and making kites．
Alice's twin sister Ann likes drawing pictures．
教师再放一遍录音，学生跟读然后核对答案。
(3)教师说：
“We all know Liu Yun is Alice's friend now．Liu Yun writes an e-mail to Alice．Let's read her reply．Please read the mail and tell me something about Liu Yun．"学生翻开课本或看挂图阅读第二封电子邮件。读完后请学生试着说一说刘芸的爱好及家庭情况。
(4)教师放第二封电子邮件的录音，学生跟读。教师指导学生完成Answer the questions的练习。教师再放一遍录音，学生核对答案。
31
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(5)如果时间允许，教师简要介绍一下英文电子邮件的格式。(www.61k.com)
Group work
(1)学生进行小组内调查，问：“What is your hobby?'’并可将对方的业余爱好简单记录下来。
(2)学生进行汇报：“?likes?”，师生可共同评选出班里爱好最广泛的学生。 Goodtoknow
教师带读Good to know中有关英语信封各部分名称的词汇，让学生说说含义，然后教师出示一个汉语信封与一个英语信封，让学生进行比较。教师介绍一些相关知识。
Let's sing
(1)教师放歌曲“My Pen Pal'’的录音，学生先仔细听录音，然后跟教师读歌曲。
(2)学生跟录音学唱歌曲。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)让学生做本单元A Let's read部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)让学生听A部分的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
(3)让学生听Let's sing部分的歌曲，唱给家长或同伴听。
五．课后反思
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写五个动词的第三人称单数形式：lives，teaches，goes，watches，reads。
2．能够听、说、认读句子：Does your pen pal live in Shanghai? No，
he doesn't．He lives in Beijing．
3．能够听懂、说唱歌谣“Tell me about your pen pal"。
4．能够听懂、理解Story time中的故事。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时的教学重点是听、说、读、写掌握五个动词的第三人称单数形式。
2．本课时的教学难点是区别使用后缀s和es。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。
2．教师准备A、B部分let's learn的单词卡片。
3．教师准备一些动物单词卡片和第一单元Let's learn部分的单词卡片。
4．教师准备Story time部分的挂图和一只玩具猴。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放第一单元Let's sing部分的歌曲“How Do You Go to School?”，学生听录音齐唱。
(2)教师放歌曲“My Pen Pal"，学生听录音齐唱。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师出示A Let's learn部分的单词卡片，同桌开火车拼读动词短语。
(2)教师放A Let's read部分的录音，学生跟读。
32
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案 扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(3)师生对话。[www.61k.com]
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)教师板书：live，然后指着自己说：“I live in? Where do you live in?'’引导学生作答后教师出示一张动物单词卡片，如：fish，问：“What is this?'’引导学生作答。教师继续问：“Does it live in the sky?”引导学生回答：“No，
it doesn't.it lives in rivers．回答时教师有意强调lives的发音。教师在黑板上的live后加上s。教师依次拿出其它动物的单词卡片，用一般现在时的一般疑问句形式就动物的住所提问，引导学生作答。教师再问：“Does your father/mother/pen pal live in?? 引导学生给出肯定或否定回答。教师板书：
Does your father/mother/pen pal live in Shanghai? No，
he doesn't．He fives in Beijing．教师向学生展示lives单词卡片，带读单词。
(2)教师说：I teach English．Does Mr?teach English?”引导学生作答：“No，
he doesn't．He teaches?，’教师板书：teaches(es可用另一种颜色标出)，然后再用几位其它学科的教师的名字提问，引导学生给出完整回答。
(3)教师说：“I go to work by bus．How do you go t0 school?'’引导学生回答： go to school by?”教师继续问：
“How does your father go to work? Does you go to work by bus?”引导学生作答后板书：goes to work。教师继续提问几名学生：“Does your father／
mother go to work by??”引导学生作答。随后教学watches和reads。教师指导学生拼写单词。建议教师引导学生比较动词原形和其第三人称单数形式，并用这两种形式造句加深印象，让学生在比较中逐步掌握。
(4)教师将本部分的单词卡片混在一起，快速展示给学生，学生读，然后同桌开火车进行问答操练。
(5)“猜一猜”游戏
教师出示第一单元A Let's learn部分的单词卡片，任意抽出一张，问：
“How does your aunt／grandmother／grandfather／teacher go to work?学生猜：“He goes to work on foot／by subway／?”教师给猜对的小组加分。
(6)教师放B Let's learn部分的录音，学生跟读。
(7)学生看板书提示根据实际情况进行问答操练。
Let's practice.
(1)学生四人一组讨论用英语描述Bill的一天，并轮流用英语表达。
(2)每个小组派代表上台介绍。
(3)“考考你的记忆力”游戏
教师介绍某人的一天，然后请学生复述．
Let's chant
(1)教师放第44页上歌谣的录音，学生跟录音说唱。
(2)学生分组说唱歌谣。
Story time ，
教师向学生展示Story time部分的挂图，指着图中的人物问：“What are they doing? What does Joe see? Does Joe like the monkey?”然后教师放该部分的录音，学生听录音跟读、分角色朗读。如果时间允许，教师指导学生进行对话表演。
巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生做本单元B Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)学生听Let's learn部分的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
33
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(3)学生背诵并抄写本课四会单词。（www.61k.com）
(4)“吉姆的故事”游戏
学生五人一组。第一名学生说：“Jim lives in the country．”第二名学生说
“Jim lives in the country．He lives on a farm．”第三名学生说：
“Jim lives in the country．He lives on a farm．He goes to work by car．”依次进行，每人在前面学生的基础上再加一句话。同桌之问也可以进行该游戏。
五．课后反思
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
能够听、说、读、写句型：Does she teach English? No，she doesn't．Yes．she does．
二、教学重，难点分析
1.本课时的教学重点是四会掌握句型：Does she teach English? No，she doesn’t．Yes，she does．
2．本课时的教学难点是在实际情景中正确运用所学对话。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。
2．教师准备B Let's learn的单词卡片和B Let's talk的挂图。
3．教师准备卡片若干，正面写有人名，反面写有地名。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放歌曲“My Pen Pal”的录音，学生跟录音齐唱。
(2)学生开火车介绍自己同桌的业余爱好，如：“?likes?其同桌说：No,I like?．”
(3)教师放Let's chant部分的歌谣“Tell me about your pen pal’’的录音，录音说唱歌谣。
2．预习(Preview)
教师出示B Let's learn部分的单词卡片，问：“Does your uncle live in??Does
he go to work by??Does he read newspapers in the morning／evening? Does he watch at night?”学生根据实际情况作出肯定或否定面答。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Main Scene
教师引导学生看主情景图。教师说：“Look! Chert Jie is looking at some picture. Her Mother is beside her. What are they talking about?”学生分角色朗读。教师可让学生试着用英语描述陈杰的笔友的情况。以下内容供参考：
He is from Canada．He lives in the city.
He goes to school by bus．
Let's try
He tikes making planes．He likes swimming.
学生听录音，做Let's try部分的练习Listen and circle.
Let's talk
(1) 教师说：“Zhang Peng’s mother is a teacher．What does she teach? Does she teach
English?”教师出示Let's talk部分的挂图，放录音，学生听录音阅读对话。教师出
34
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
示主句型：Does he／she??Yes，he／she does．No，he／she doesn't．然后教师引导学生回答刚刚提出的问题，逐步掌握肯定和否定回答。(www.61k.com)再放一遍, 学生跟读.
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(2) 教师说：“My mother is a teacher，too．Do you want to know more about her．Ask
me some questions.”教师依次出示B Let's learn部分的单词卡片，提示学生根 据上面的短语和黑板上的重点句型提问，教师作答。
(3)教师指导学生进行替换练习。必要时，提示学生可以换一下对话里的人物，f
如：Does your uncle live in the city? Yes，he does．Does your grandma live in the country? No，she doesn't．
(4)“寻找家园”游戏
教师准备一些卡片，正面写有人名，反面写有地名，如：city，country，village, farm，forest，mountain，nature park等。请一名学生上台抽取一张卡片，问台一学生：“Guess．Where does?live?'’学生猜：“Does he／she live in／on??”猜对的小组得一分。
(5)教师指导学生书写四会句子。
Tick and say
学生听录音，然后完成书上的表格。
(1)教师发给学生每人一张表格，表格内容见学生用书第52页。学生将个人信息填好后交给教师。教师请一名学生上台从一摞表格中抽取一张，告诉台下学生：“It's a boy／girl．”学生分成两大组，轮流提问，如：“Does he／she like drawing pictures? Does he／she goes to school by bus?”等等，看哪一组先猜出填写卡片的人是谁。
(2)复习Pronunciation，Good to know和Story time的内容。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生做本单元B Let's talk部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)学生听Let's learn，Let's talk部分的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
(3)学生背诵并抄写本课四会句子。
课后反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读句子：They are very different．
2．能够完成Let's check部分的练习。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时教学重点和难点是理解Let's read中的短文。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备录音机及录音带。
2．教师准备A、B部分Let's learn的单词卡片和B Let's read的挂图。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放第二单元Let's sing部分的歌曲“Where Are You Going?”，学生一起拍手唱。
(2)教师放Let’s chant部分的歌"Let's chant Tell me about your pen pal"，学生跟录音有节奏地说唱。
2．预习(Preview)
35
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(1)学生听录音跟读A、B部分Let's learn，Let's talk和A Let's read的内容。［www.61k.com)
(2)教师出示A、B部分Let's learn的单词卡片，学生就单词卡片进行问答练习，如：What is your hobby? Does your uncle live in Beijing?等等。
(3)“拼单词”游戏
学生分成若干小组。教师报一个四会单词，如：stamp，各小组第一排的学生争取第一个起立拼出该单词，首先正确拼出单词的为本组赢得一分。
(4)学生交流汇报Task time的完成情况，如：“?is a?He／She goes to work at?He／She goes to work by?He／She lives in?He／She?in the evening”。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s read
(1)教师说：“Do you remember Alice and her twin sister? They look the same·” 后教师指着班上的两名学生问：“Do they look the same?”引导学生给出否定回答。教师给出完整回答：“No，they don't．They look different．”教师板书different，带读。教师接着问：“Do they have the same hobbies?”引导学生说出否定回答：“No，they don't．”教师说：“They’re very different．”教师向学生展示本部分的挂图，手指图中的孪生姐妹对学生说：“This is Alice. This is her twin sister．They look the same，but do they like the same things? Do they go to school together? Let's read．”教师放本部分的录音，让学生打开课本，带着问题阅读。
(2)教师指导学生完成Write the questions and the answers的练习。
(3)教师放Let's read部分的录音，学生听录音跟读。
(4)四人小组试读短文，然后请两、三个小组朗读短文。
Let's play
(1)请一名学生上台，他心中想好某一个同学的名字，台下学生通过提问猜这名学生是谁，如：“Does he go to schoo1 by bus? Does he like playing football／??”也可进行男女生比赛，看哪一队用最少的does引导的问句猜出这名学生的名字。
(2)四人小组做游戏。
Let's check
(1)教师指导学生完成Let's check部分的练习Listen and write the answers。
(2)“记者招待会”活动
请一名学生上台扮演一位名人举行一次记者招待会，其他学生扮演记者。记者分别向“名人”提问，如：Where do you live? What does your mother do? What does your father do? What is your hobby? Do you have a pen pal? Where does he five?等等，扮演名人的学生尽量给出合情合理的回答。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生做本单元B Let's read部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)学生听本单元的录音，读给家长或同伴听。
(3)学生背诵并书写本单元四会单词和句子。
课后反思：
Unit 5 教案
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写本课单词：singer，writer，actress，actor，artist，TV reporter。
36
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
2．能够理解、认读白体句子：What does your father／mother do? He's／She's a?
3．能够听懂、会唱歌曲“My Family”。(www.61k.com) i
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课重点是掌握A Let's learn部分的五种职业的英文表达，并能简单问答、介绍，表达自己的理想。
2．本课难点是在正确区分运用冠词an和a，如：an actress，a writer。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
3．建议教师参考四年级上册Unit 6中Part B部分的内容。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备四年级上册第六单元和本课的录音带。
2．师准备本课单词卡片、四年级上册B Let's learn部分的单词卡片she，he，it等代词卡片、Sarah等人物的头饰、一些名人的图片。
3．学生准备本课单词卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
教师放四年级上册第74页的歌谣，学生边说边根据内容做一些动作。
2．预习(Preview)
“指手画脚”活动
教师把doctor，teacher，nurse，driver，farmer，baseball player等单词卡片面朝下放在桌上。一名学生抽一张卡片，用动作表演卡片上的职业，其他学生猜职名称。第一个猜出的学生抽下一张卡片继续做游戏。
3.新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s start
教师展示本部分的挂图，然后对学生说：“I am a teacher．I teach lessons．”教师板书：teach，teacher。注意：teach和teacher用不同颜色的笔标出来。请学生观察两个词并说出差别。教师通过一些动作给学生以提示，帮助学生理解几种职业的含义。注意提示学生dancer，driver，writer三个词是直接在原动词后面加r。
Let's learn
(1)教师出示singer图片，示范朗读，让学生跟说并做动作。
(2)教师出示一名歌手的照片，问：“What does she／he do?”引导学生回答：“She／He is a singer．”启发学生说出更多歌手的名字。
(3)用同样的方法学习其他职业：writer，TV reporter。教师依次拿出几张演员的照片，问学生：“What does he do?”引导学生回答：“He's an actor．”然后教师再依次拿出几张女演员的照片，问：“What does she do?”引导学生回答：“She is a11 actress．”教师提示学生在actress和actor前面要用an。
(4)“快看快拼”活动
教师快速出示一张本部分的单词卡片，学生争取首先拼出单词。
(5)教师指导学生在学生卡片背面边拼读边描红。
(6)“快看快说”活动
教师同时决速出示一张职业图片和she，he，Sarah中的任一张卡片，学生根据卡片上的内容快速说出一个句子，如：She is an actress．
(7)教师向学生展示杂志上的名人照片，问：“Who's he／she? What does he／she do?”引导学生回答：“That's?He's／She's a?”
(8)“对卡片、说句子”活动
学生把本课职业单词卡片正面朝上放在课桌上，随意抽取一张。教师也从自己的卡片中抽取一张，然后和学生同时说：“What does she do?”教师迅速 向学生展示自己的卡片，和教师选同一张卡片的学生起立根据卡片内容回答：“She's a?”
巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
Group work
(1)教师依次戴上Amy，Chen Jie等人物的头饰，并介绍说：
“I am Amy．I am Going to be an artist．I am John．Iamgoingtobe a／an?”然后向一名学生提问：“What are you going to be?”引导学生回答：“I'm going to be a
37
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
／an?”
(2)学生翻开课本第58页，在表格第一列填入要采访的同学名字，然后在教室里走动调查，完成表格，找出最受全班学生欢迎的职业。[www.61k.com)
(3)Let's sing
(3)做活动手册A Let's learn部分的配套练习。
(4)“按顺序排队”活动
(5)“追单词”活动
课后反思：
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求 ’
1．能够听懂、会说本课对话，并能做替换练习。 _
2．能够听、说、读、写句型“What does your mother do? She is a dancer．”并能在情景中运用。
3．了解元音／u：／，／u／和辅音／w／，／j／，／h／，／u／，／d3／的发音并读出例词。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课重点是掌握句型：What does?do? She／He is a／an?
2． 本课难点是重点句型中问句的表达。
三、课前准备
1.教师准备本单元A部分单词卡片和四年级上册B Let's learn部分的单词卡片币套自制的家庭成员卡片。
2．学生每人准备和教师相同的三套卡片和第四、五单元的音标卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放c部分歌曲“My Family”的录音，学生跟唱。
(2)“说出来，接力赛!”活动
全班学生分成几列站好。教师从本单元A Let's learn部分的卡片中随意抽取一张，每队的第一名学生A读出卡片上的单词并做出简单陈述，如：
Write,My father is a writer．然后站到队尾，如果不能正确表述则被罚下出局。教师再抽取一张卡片，每队的第二名学生说句子，依此类推。
2．预习(Preview)
Let's try
学生打开学生用书第59页，教师放录音，学生听音、选择。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's talk
(1)“排列卡片”活动
学生两人一组将A Let's learn部分的单词卡片和四年级上册B Let's learn部
分 的单词卡片一起正面朝上放在桌上。教师打乱顺序读卡片上的单词，学生按教师读的顺序摆放卡片并读出卡片上的单词。然后，教师可以用句子描述卡片上的职业，如：I teach lessons．学生说出职业名称后排列卡片。
(2)教师说：“My mother is a teacher．What does your mother do?请几名学生用“She is a(profession)．”来回答。教师继续说：
“My father is a farmer．What does your father do?”引导学生作答。教师板书并示范朗读句型：“What does your mother do?She is a TV reporter．”学生跟读、口拼句型。
(3)教师放课文录音，学生跟读。学生两人一组做对话替换练习。
38
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(4)“背靠背”活动
(5)教师指导学生书写四会句子或完成活动手册上的书写练习。[www.61k.com)
Pronunciation
(1)教师向学生展示该部分的挂图，示范朗读音标／u：／，／u／，／w／，／{／，／h／，／tf／，／d3／，学生跟读。示范发／tf／，／d3／，学生跟读并摸摸自己的喉咙以感觉浊音的／d3／和清音的／tf／的区别。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(2)教师引导学生通过拼读音标，尝试读出表格中的例词。然后教师放该部分的录音，学生跟读。鼓励学生说出更多含有本课音标的单词。教师指导学生完成Read and match的活动。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension
Group work
(1)学生在59页表格第一列的第2～4格中填人要采访的同学名字，(如不够用可写在空白处)，然后去采访班里同学：“What does your mother／father do?”如果时间允许，可以让几名学生汇报调查结果。
(2)“语音乒乓”活动
学生两人一组，每组学生轮流说出一个音标及含有该音标的单词，如：
学生A：|w|
学生B：wood
(3)“说出来，宾果”游戏
(4)做活动手册A Let's talk部分的配套练习。
教学反思：
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的对话，完成相应的活动。
2．能够运用所学语言完成Let's find out活动。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课重点是巩固句型：What does?do? He／She is a／an?
2．本课难点是理解、认读句型“How exciting!”和
“How does she go to Hong Kong? She goes to Hong Kong by plane．，其中，第二个句型是为B部分内容的铺垫，建议课上适当操练。
三．课前准备
1．教师准备本单元A部分的单词卡片，四年级上册B Let's learn部分的单词卡一套自制的家庭成员卡片。
2．教师准备一个大的空盒子和一位朋友的图片和资料词卡。
3．学生准备一些名人的图片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
“炸弹”活动
复习A Let's learn部分的职业词汇和Pronunciation部分的例词及含有该部分’
的词汇。活动具体操作方法详见本单元供选择的游戏。为使这个游戏更富激性，可以把学生分成两队，让两个队轮流说字母进行比赛。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)将全班分成两大组。教师从A Let's learn部分的单词卡片中任意抽取一张，举起来，两大组根据卡片内容做问答练习：What does he／she do? He's／She，
(2)教师出示有关职业和家庭成员的单词卡片，请两名自愿上台表演的学生
仿 A Let's talk部分内容做对话表演。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let"s read
39
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(1)教师发给每名学生一张纸条，让学生在纸条上写下自己的名字、外貌特征将来想从事的职业。[www.61k.com)然后四名学生一组进行投掷比赛，如果谁能把纸团扔进前面的大盒子里，就可以大声说：“I'm going to be a／an(profession)．”如果纸团没有扔进盒子里，就没有机会大声说出自己将来想从事的职业。学生投掷进行得热烈的时候，教师大声说：
“How exciting!”然后在黑板上板书How exciting!教师适时说几次“How exciting!”然后带读：“Exciting!game is exciting．How exciting!”学生跟说。
(2)猜一猜
教师从刚才游戏中使用的大纸盒里随意拿出一个纸团，把纸条上所写的人的特征和所向往的职业告诉学生，并提问：“Who's he／she?'’请学生猜一猜：写这张纸条的学生是谁。
(3)教师课前准备一个朋友的照片或简笔画，把该人物的相关信息分别写在纸上附在相应的照片后面，然后向学生介绍：“This is my friend．教师鼓励学生提问，如：What does she／he like? What does she／he do? Where does she／he work? How does she／he go to work?教师回答，如：She／He works.?She／He goes to work by?
(4)学生分小组或同桌之间进行问答练习．
(5)教师说：
“Wu Yifan has an aunt and an uncle．Do you know anything about them?”学生回答。教师说：“OK．Now open your books and read the dialogue
(6)教师向学生展示A Let's read部分的挂图，指着照片上的两个人物问：
“What does she／he do?”
(7)教师放本部分录音，学生打开学生用书阅读短文，然后教师解答疑难点。注意：本部分的最后两个句子：How does she go to Hong Kong? She goes to Hong Kong by plane．是
B Let's talk的主要句型。
(8)教师指导学生完成Answer the questions的活动。
(9)再放一遍录音，核对答案。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)“嘟嘟”活动 。
教师读课文的对话，用beep替换句中的一个词，然后让学生说出被替换的词并试着说出完整的句子。学生熟悉规则后，可以让程度较好的学生担任教师角色读句子。
(2)“找一找，说句子”活动
同桌学生使用一本学生用书，翻开B Let's read部分。教师读其中的一句，学生争取首先用手指点出这句话，并大声读出来。
(3)学生做活动手册A Let's read部分的配套练习。
(4)教师放第57页上的歌谣录音，学生跟说。
教学反思：
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写单词：engineer，accountant，policeman，salesperson，cleaner
2．能够听、说、认读“How does he go to work? He goes to work by bike．并能在情景中运用。
3．了解Good to know部分的内容。
二．教学重、难点分析
1．本课重点是掌握Let's learn部分的五个职业名称，并能简单问答、介绍。
2．本课难点是熟练掌握单词：engineer，accountant，policeman，salesperson。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。
2．教师准备描述职业的词条。
40
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
3．学生准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片。(www.61k.com］
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放第57页上的歌谣录音，学生跟说。
(2)教师放歌曲“My Family'’的录音，学生跟唱。
(3)“音乐椅子”活动(详见本单元“供选择的游戏”)。
2．预习(Preview)
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
“快闪”活动
教师从A Let's learn部分的单词卡片里任意抽取一张，快速展示给学生后放下，学生根据卡片上的内容说一句话。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let"s learn
(1)教师举起engineer的卡片，说：“Look at this man．What does he do?”引导学生回答后带读，学生跟读。让学生说说他们知道的工程师的名字，如：
“My uncle is an engineer．”
(2)用类似的方法学习其它词：accountant，policeman，salesperson，cleaner。
(3)“排列卡片”活动
学生把本部分的五张卡片面朝上放在自己的桌上。教师打乱顺序读出其中几张卡片的单词，学生根据教师读的顺序排好卡片，然后大声读出卡片上的单词。教师可以逐渐加快速度并变换单词顺序。
(4)“选一选”活动
教师把五张单词卡片贴在黑板上，问：“What are you going to be?”引导学生回答。
(5)教师把bike的卡片贴在engineer的下面，并介绍说：
“He goes to work by bike．”学生跟读。然后教师依次在accountant，policeman，salesperson和cleaner的卡片下面贴上交通工具的卡片，如：subway，bus，car，motor cycle等。教师问：“How does he／she go to work?”引导学生回答：“He／
She goes to work by?”接着教师问学生：“How does your mother／
father go to work?”并根据回答在相应的交通工具下打钩，调查一下哪种交通方式使用得最普遍。
(6)教师指导学生边拼读边在学生卡片的背面描红。
Let's find out
(1)学生打开学生用书第6l页，教师指导学生完成Let's find out部分的练习。
(2)“指手划脚”活动
教师说本部分的一个句子，如：“He sells things．”学生用动作表现对应的职业。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)“我比划，你来猜”活动
请五六名学生到教室前，第一名学生背对黑板，其他则面朝黑板站好。教师给第一名学生A看一张职业单词卡片或描述职业的词条，学生A猜一猜职业名称，然后用动作表演该职业，第二名学生B根据学生A的动作猜职业名称并根据自己的理解表演动作，以此类推，最后一名学生根据前面学生的动作说出职业名称。
(2)“聚精会神”活动
使用两套A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片，详见本单元“供选择的游戏”。
(3)Goodtoknow
教师出示一张男警察的图片说：“A policeman．”然后教师再出示一张女警察的图片并问：“Is she a policeman?”引导学生回答：“No，
she isn’t．She is policewoman．”同法介绍其它职业的不同表达法。
(4)做活动手册B Let's learn部分的配套练习。
教学反思：
41
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
1． 能够听懂、会说本课对话，并能在情境中运用。[www.61k.com］
2． 能够听、说、读、写句型“Where does she work? How does she go to work?”并 在情景中运用。
3． 能够理解Story time的故事内容。
二、教学重、难点分析
1． 本课重点是掌握句型：Where does she work? How does she go to work?
2． 本课难点是正确使用本单元重点句型。
3． 建议教师为学生提供部分工作场所名词，句型教学可参考第一单元内容。
三、课前准备
1． 教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片、家庭成员卡片和一些交通方式的卡片。
2． 教师准备Story time部分的挂图。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
“少了什么?”活动
教师把A、B Let's learn部分的职业卡片和家庭成员卡片贴在黑板上，学生观看记忆两分钟后闭上眼睛，教师快速拿掉其中一张卡片，然后学生睁开眼睛找出拿下的是哪张卡片，第一个找出来并正确读出单词的学生可以得到这张卡片。
2．预习(Preview)
(1)教师放第一单元歌曲“How Do You Go to School?'’的录音，学生跟唱。在热身活动中得到卡片的学生开始把卡片传给后面的同学，依次传递，歌曲结束时，得到卡片的学生用卡片上的单词说一个句子，如：?is a?
(2)Let's try
学生打开学生用书第62页，教师放录音，学生听音、勾出正确的选项。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's talk
(1)教师说：“I go to school by subway．”在黑板上板书：subway，学生跟说，然后教师启发学生说出其它的交通方式，教师把学生想到的交通方式依次写在subway的下面。教师说：“1 work in a schoo1．”然后把school写在黑板上，启发学生说说不同的工作场所名称，如：post office，hospital，computer／shoe/car/?company等
(2)“贴卡片”活动
教师说句子，如：
My mother works in a Car company．She's an accountant．She goes to work by bus．持有mother，bus和accountant卡片的学生快速跑到黑板前把卡片贴在Car company的旁边。
(3)教师就黑板上的内容和学生做对话练习，如：
What does your mother do?Where does she work?How does she go to work?教师板书“Where does she work?”和“How does she go to work?”，示范朗读，学生跟说。学生两人一组根据黑板上的语言提示做对话练习。
(4)“看卡片，说句子”活动
(5)教师放本部分的录音，学生跟读。学生两人一组读课文对话。
(6)学生两人一组做对话替换练习。
(7)教师指导学生书写四会句子。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and ex tension)
Group work
(1)学生在教室里走动并采访几名同学，如：
Where does your father work? How does he go to work?并记录在自制的表格内。调查结束后，请几名学生汇报调查结果，如：
Sarah's father works in a schoo1．He goes to work by subway
(2)做活动手册B Let's talk部分的配套练习。
42
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(3)Let's check
做C部分Let's check练习，学生听音打勾。（www.61k.com)
(4)Story time
教师向全班学生展示本部分的挂图，根据故事的内容提几个问题，
着问题听录音阅读故事。
教学反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、认读Let's read部分的短文，完成相应的活动。
2．能够运用所学语言较好完成Task Time部分的活动。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课重点是操练巩固本单元11个职业名称和重点句型：What does he／
she do?Where does he／she work? How does he／she go to work?
2．本课难点是帮助学生理解短文中的新语言，如：
help the bank use their money likes helping people，
help tourists find their way。
3．建议教师课前让学生预习Task Time部分的内容，必要时做些记录。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片和四年级上册B Let's learn部分的职业 单词卡片。
2.教师准备一个计时表、Main scene部分的挂图和B Let's read部分的教学挂图。
3.教师准备长卡片，上面写有职业选择建议，如：If you like drawing，
you can be engineer．
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)”翻卡”活动
学生两人一组，将A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片面朝上放在自己的课桌上,教师打乱顺序说卡片上的词或说一句与卡片内容相关的句子，学生争取第1个把相关的卡片翻过去。 ．
(2)“10秒钟最佳者”活动
教师把A、B Let's learn部分的单词卡片和四年级上册B Let's learn部分的职业单词卡片贴在黑板上。学生三人一组，其中，学生A是命名者，学生B是学生c是裁判员。教师说：“Go!”学生A在十秒钟内说职业名称。时间到，教师说：“Stop!”各组的学生B和学生c报告本组的学生A说对了多少单词，看谁说的单词最多。每组学生交换角色继续做活动。
2．预习(Preview)
教师展示Main scene部分的挂图，学生看图并回答教师的问题，如：
Who is that man? What does the man do? Where does he work? How does zip go to school?然后教师提 供给学生一些头饰、道具等，让学生自编对话，表演。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let"s read
(1)教师问：“What are you going to be?”学生回答。教师问：
‘‘What's your hobby? 学生回答。教师继续问：
“What subject do you like best?’’学生回答。教师根据学生的回答向学生出示相关的择业建议，如：If you like math，you can be an accountant．”教师说：
“I have some more tips here．”然后把剩余的字条全翻贴在黑板上。
(2)教师说：
43
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
“Would you like to know three new friends? They have different hobbies and they have different jobs．Please open your books and read the passage
(3)教师出示本部分的挂图，指着第一幅插图问：
“Who's this woman? What is her hobby? What does she do? Where does she work? How does she go to work?"让学生带着问题阅读，读后回答问题。（www.61k.com）
(4)同法学习后面两段的内容。教师解释难点，如：
“He helps the bank use their money well．She often helps tourists find their way．”等。建议教师适时告诉学生，要丰富自己的业余生活，培养广泛的兴趣爱好。
(5)教师放本部分录音，学生跟读。
(6)教师指导学生完成Answer the questions．的活动。
(7)“嘟嘟声”活动
教师快速读课文，故意用beep替换句子中的一个单词，学生听后说出被替换掉的单词并试着说出整个句子。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension) _
Task time
(1)教师指导学生根据语言提示完成My parents中的表格，让学生两人一组，学生A问学生B表格中的问题，学生B根据自己填写的内容回答，学生A将内容记录在
My partner's parents的表格里。然后两人互换角色，学生B提问，学生A回答，最后两人比较表格所填写内容是否一致。
(2)你问我答
学生五至六人一组围坐成一圈，学生A站在圈中心，其他学生询问其家庭成员的工作情况，如：What does your uncle do? How does he go to work? What does he work?等。然后由学生B站到圈中心，其他学生提问。
(3)做活动手册B Let's read部分的配套练习。
(4)“同号争魁”活动
学生四至六人一组，依次编号。教师报一个号码和一个职业名称，各小组有此号码的学生到黑板前写出单词，第一个正确写出单词的学生可为本队得一分。
教学反思：
Unit 6 教案
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写A Let's learn部分的黑体单词：stream，rain，cloud，sun听、说、认读白体单词：vapour。
2．能够听、说、认读白体句子：Where does the rain come from?
3．能够完成Let's find out的任务。
4．学唱歌曲“Little Water Drop"。
5．了解水结成冰的相关知识。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时的教学重点和难点是Let's learn部分的四会单词：stream，rain，cloud，SUN和三会单词vapour。教师要启发学生开动脑筋巧记单词，并结合所给句型替换关键词，在情景中学习新单词，逐步达到掌握要求。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备A Let's learn部分的挂图和单词卡片，准备四年级下册第四单元
B Let’s learn部分rainy的单词卡片，准备其它景物的单词卡片。
44
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
2．教师准备实物投影仪、录音机及录音带。[www.61k.com］
3．教师准备一大张空白画纸，一个小玩具。
4．教师准备四年级下册第四单元B部分的歌谣录音带。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
5．学生准备A Let's learn部分的单词卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放四年级下册第四单元B部分的歌谣录音，学生跟说歌谣并做出相应的动作。
(2)教师说：
“We drink water every day．We need water every day．What else needs water?”教师出示Let's start部分的挂图，引导学生看图回答：Trees／Flower／Animals／
Birds need warm．Fish needs water，too．教师可以启发学生，想出更多动植物、昆虫名称，然后继续问：“Where does water come from?’引导学生回答：
“It comes from rivers，seas，rain，snow?”
2．预习(Preview)
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's learn
(1)教师拿出四年级下册第四单元rainy的单词卡片，说：“Today，
we're going to talk about rain．Where does it come from? Does it come from the sky?”教师在黑板上画出雨的简笔画，板书rain并带读。
(2)教师提问：“Where does the rain come from?'’引导学生回答：
“It comes from the clouds．”教师画出乌云的简笔画，板书cloud并带读。同法引出vapour，sun. 在引出四个重点词汇后，教师也在黑板上完成了一幅水循环的简笔画。教师继续问：“Where does the vapour come from?'’引导学生回答：
“It comes from the stream．”教师画小溪的简笔画，板书并带读：stream。
(3)“快看快猜”游戏
教师从上到下逐层展示Let's learn部分的挂图，请学生猜图上的景物。教师指着图中的景物提问：“What's this?'’引导学生回答：“It's the sun／cloud/vapour／rain／lake／grass／stream．”
(4)快速反应
教师指着黑板上水循环的简笔画(rain—cloud—vapour—sun—water)提问，
如 “Where does the rain come from?'’请学生根据图的提示回答：“Cloud．”待学生熟悉新句型后，请一名学生上台说问句，其他学生抢答。
(5)学生两人一组，拿出自己的单词卡片。一名学生随意抽出一张卡片，根据卡片上的内容问：“Where does the?come from?'另一名学生从自己的卡片中拿出相应的卡片回答：“It comes from?”两人轮流提问。
Let's find out
教师问学生：“What do we have in nature?”启发学生回答：“Rivers／
Cloud/Mountains／Forests／Flowers／Animals／Birds／?”学生翻开学生用书第70页，教师问：“What can you see in the picture?”请一名学生示范回答：
“I can see the sun．”然后学生五人一组找出图中的景物，用英文表述并在图上注上英文.
Let's sing
学生听录音学唱歌曲“Little Water Drop"。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
45
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(1)记忆游戏
学生合上课本。(www.61k.com）教师根据Let's find out部分的图画提问：
“Is there a sun in the picture?”学生凭记忆抢答。待学生熟悉后，教师说句子，请学生根据图画；判断正误。比如，教师说：“There isn't a sun in the picture．”学生应该说：“Yes,there is．”
(2)传玩具说单词
教师拿出准备好的小玩具，掷给一名学生A，学生A要说出一个自然界中存在的事物名称，然后再把玩具掷向任一名学生B。如果答不上来或答错，则被淘汰出局，最后剩下的一名学生获胜。
(3)做本单元A Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习。
(4)Good to know
教师介绍水结成冰以后体积变大的相关知识，鼓励学生通过实验的方法验证自己的判断。教师也可以启发学生思考水在自然界的其它存在形式。
教学反思：
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写“Where does the rain come from? It comes from the clouds．” 能替换运用于水循环的整个过程。
2．能够完成Task time。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时需要重点掌握句型：
Where does the rain come from? It comes from the clouds．要求学生能替换关键词造新句并能在水循环的整个过程自如运用。
2．本课时的难点是Let's时部分，内容多，词汇量大。建议教师多放几遍录音，适时给学生以提示。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备Let's缸y部分的挂图。
2．教师准备A Let's learn的单词卡片。
3．教师准备水循环实验仪器：酒精灯一个、盖量杯一个、水等。
4．学生准备水彩笔、胶水、剪刀等工具。
四、教学步骤和建议
1． 热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放歌曲“Little Water Drop”的录音，学生跟唱。
(2)日常口语练习。以下内容供参考：
Where do you come from?
Where does．．．come from?
教师可以向学生展示一些名人照片，利用第二个句型询问名人的家乡。
2．预习(Preview)
教师依次出示A Let's learn部分的单词卡片，学生齐读后张贴在黑板上。然教师迅速拿走所有词卡，请学生回忆并拼读五个单词。
Let's try
46
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(1)教师问：“What do you have for breakfast?'’请学生回答。（www.61k.com]教师说：
“I usually have bread and milk for breakfast．Do you like bread? Where does bread come from?”然后出示本部分的挂图，手指面粉和小表的图，让学生猜一猜： “What's this?”然后放Let's try部分的录音。
(2)完成标号练习后，教师可以指着本部分的三幅图问：
“Where does bread/flour come from?”引导学生回答：“It comes from?”
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s talk
(1)教师利用Let’s try部分引出主句型：Where does?come from? It comes from?教师板书问答句，带读后继续提问：“Where does apple juice／milk come from?”引导学生回答。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(2)教师拿出rain的单词卡片，贴在黑板上，问：“Where does the rain come from?引导学生回答：“It comes from the clouds．”然后，教师将cloud的单词卡片贴在黑板上。同样的方法在问答的过程中将其他三张卡片依次贴在黑板，组成一个水循环过程的简易图。同桌之间根据单词卡片的提示进行问答练习。
(3)“你问我答”游戏
学生分成两大组，站成两列。两列学生轮流针对水循环的过程提问，如：
Where does the vapour come from?It comes from the water．答上来可以得到一分，最后得分高的小组获胜。
(4)教师一边演示水循环实验的过程一边用英文进行简单讲解。
(5)教师放本部分的录音，学生跟读。
(6)教师指导学生写出水循环的过程，看谁写得又快Y．AE确。
Group work
学生分小组对水循环的过程进行问答练习，然后教师请每个小组选一名代表上台,叙述水循环的简单过程。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
“快速反应”游戏
全班分四大组，各组分别命名为：water，vapour，cloud，rain。教师提问：
“Where does the cloud come from?”vapour小组的成员应迅速起立并回答：
“It come from the vapour．”
做本单元A Let's talk部分的活动手册配套练习。
教学反思：
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够简单叙述小水滴的“旅行经历”并通过阅读进一步熟悉水循环的过程。
2．能认读音标：／。：／，／D／，／ts／，／dz／，／tr／，／dr／并能朗读例词，Read and match的练习。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课教学重难点是使学生通过阅读进一步理解水循环的过程，教师应注意设计
一 些真实的情景帮助学生理解。由于这个单元是阅读单元，另外A Let's read部分短文
47
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
较难，因此这部分没有安排读后活动，学生只要理解短文即可。（www.61k.com]
三、课前准备
1．教师准备小水滴和风先生等各种头饰。
2．教师准备单词卡片。
3．教师准备课ALet's read部分的挂图。
4．学生课前做好小水滴和风先生等的头饰。
四，教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师播放第68页上的歌谣，学生跟录音有节奏地说唱。
(2)日常口语练习：Where does the cloud come from?
How does the water become vapour?
2．预习(Preview)
(1)快看快说
教师出示一张单词卡片，如：stream，学生读出单词并拼写。教师注意帮助学生总结记忆单词的窍门。
(2)请几组学生表演A Let's talk的会话。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)教师戴上小水滴的头饰，说：
“Hello．I am little Water Drop．Nice to meet you 教师与几名学生打招呼，引导学生用“Hello，little Water Drop．”应答。然后教师请一名学上台，让他闭上眼睛，给他戴上风先生的头饰，让他睁开眼睛，教师对他说：“Hello．Mr Wind．”然后，请该学生走到同学中间，让其他学生用“Hello．Mr Wind．”同他打招呼。
(2)教师做出很热的动作说：“Little Water Drop is very hot．”然后教师展开本部分 的挂图，分别指着小水滴和风先生问：“Who is he?”引导学生回答。教师说：“Little Water Drop takes a trip．Where does he go? How is his trip? Does he have a lot of fun? Let's read．”
(3)学生打开学生用书阅读短剧。教师解答学生的问题。本部分的一个难点是比较级的用法，短文中涉及到的有cooler和higher。比较级是六年级下册中的一个教学重点，因此教师可以在这里进行适当的讲解，为下一册的教学做铺垫。
(4)教师放本部分的录音，学生跟读。
(5)学生分小组朗读对话，每个小组扮演一个角色，教师朗读叙述部分的语言。
(6)教师指导学生表演短剧。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)看谁说得多
教师出示A Let's read部分的挂图，指定一幅插图请学生进行描述，要求不能重复前面学生说过的句子。
(2)兔子耳朵
教师匀速朗读一段课文，故意漏读其中的一个词，让学生找出漏掉的词并说出完整的句子。比如教师说：“Oh no! I falling．”学生应该说：“Oh no! I am falling．”
(3)故事大王
学生三至五人一组，挑选课文中的一段对故事进行再加工，教师指导学生展开想象，可以增加新人物，比如小蚂蚁、小兔子等。最后每个小组上台表演，评选出最佳表演奖和最佳改编奖。
48
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
(4)做本单元A Let's read部分的活动手册配套练习。[www.61k.com]
Pronunciation
(1)教师出示含有字母。和字母组合or，tr，dr，ts，ds的单词：hot，clock，orange，port，fork, tree,时，train，driver，drop，dry，ants，cats，pants，hands，cards，让学生读一读，回忆字母组合在单词中的发音。然后教师出示shorts，drop，boards，draw，tropic等单词，让学生试着朗读。教师引导学生总结发音规律，出示音标，带领学生朗读。教师放本部分的录音，让学生跟读。
(2)完成Read and match的音词配对。教师放本部分的录音，学生跟读。
教学反思：
第四课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写单词：seed，soil，sprout，plant。
2．能够运用句型“First，we have the seed．”等简单描述植物种植的过程。
3．能够听懂、理解Story time中的故事。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时需要重点掌握四个单词：seed，soil，plant，sprout。
2．叙述种花的过程是本课时的难点，建议教师注意引导学生从熟悉的内容人手，逐步突破难点。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备实物：一盆鲜花，一个装满土壤的花盆、花种、西瓜籽、葵花籽、种子、苹果种子、桃核等。
2．教师准备B Let's learn部分的四张单词卡片和自制的单词词条四张。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
3．教师准备植物生长过程图片(可以参照Number and say部分)。
4．教师准备录音机和相关录音带。
5．教师准备26个字母的卡片。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
看谁写得多
全班分成若干小组，分别在教师提供的字母卡片里抽出一张，然后小组成写出以该字母开头的单词，规定时间内写得最多的小组即是胜者。
2．预习(Preview)
猜一猜
教师拿出A Let's learn部分的一张单词卡片，只露出第一个字母，将后面的字
母 挡住，学生猜单词。如果学生猜不出，教师就再让学生看第二个字母，以此类推直到学生猜出单词为止。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s learn
(1)教师出示鲜花问学生：“Do you like flowers?”学生回答。教师继续问：
do you plant flowers? What do you need?”学生可以用中文回答：“种子。教师拿出一粒花种，说：“Yes，first we need flower seeds．Look !What's this? 引导学生回答：“It's a seed．”教师出示seed的单词卡片，带读单词。教师将单词卡片贴在黑板上，板
49
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
书单词，学生拼读、书空。[www.61k.com）教师依次出示其它的种子，问：“What's this?”引导学生回答：“It's a sun flower／peach，grape／pear/flower／?seed．”
(2)教师手拿一粒花种，说：“First，we have the seed．”然后再拿出一盆装满土壤 的花盆，说：“Second，we have the soil．”教师手指花盆里的土壤说：“It's soil.然后拿出soil的单词卡片，带读后把它贴在黑板上，学生拼读、书空。教师把种子放进土壤里，说：“Now I put the seed in the soil．And then we have the sprout．”教师拿出sprout的单词卡片，带读，将它贴在黑板上。学生跟读、书空。最后，教师拿出plant的单词卡片说：“Now，we have the plant．”带读单词后把卡片贴在黑板上。
(3)教师将黑板上的四张卡片依次编号，然后教师报一个数，学生说出对应单词。
(4)猜一猜
教师拿出B Let's learn部分的单词卡片，学生猜单词。操作方法详见2?预习
(5)教师放Let's learn部分的录音，学生听音认读单词。
(6)教师指导学生书写四会单词。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)匹配游戏
教师依次出示四张单词词条，学生朗读后反面朝上贴在黑板上，接着把植物生长流程图片反面朝上贴在黑板的下方。学生分成两大组。一个小组的第一名学生选出一张词条和一张图片，如词条和图片正好匹配，就大声读出词上的单词，得一分。然后由另外一个小组选词条和图片。待学生熟悉游戏规则后可以分成几个小组进行，让更多的同学有参与的机会。
(2)做本单元B Let's learn部分的活动手册配套练习。
(3)Number and say
同桌合作完成排序部分的活动。然后教师把五幅图打乱顺序贴在黑板上，教师说句子，学生找到对应的图片。操练几次后，请一名学生上台说句子，其他学生找图片。最后，教师指导学生把五个句子连续说出来，试着叙述种花的过程。
Story time
教师放Story time的录音或VCD，帮助学生理解故事内容。学生再听一遍录音，读故事里的句子，教师指导学生发音。
教学反思：
第五课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．能够听、说、读、写句子“How do you do that? What should you do then?并能在情景中进行运用。
2．了解英文中先后顺序的表达。
二、教学重、难点分析
1．本课时需要重点听、说、读、写掌握：How do you do that? What should you do then?
2．结合种植经验叙述植物生长过程是本课时的难点，而且在叙述过程中不可避免要遇到一些新词，教师要注意突出教学重点，不要面面俱到。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备Let's时部分的挂图。
2.教师准备两幅形状相似的植物的图片。
3.学生准备水彩笔、胶水、剪刀等工具。
四、教学步骤和建议
50
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
1．热身(Warm-up)
日常口语练习。(www.61k.com)
2．预习(Preview)
Let's try
(1)教师向学生展示Let's try部分的挂图，依次指着插图进行描述，如：
The is putting the seeds in the soil．She is watering the seeds．She is looking at the sprout. (2)教师放录音，指导学生完成Let's try部分练习。
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let’s talk
(1)学生独立完成Let's时练习后，教师提问：“What should we do now?'’提示学生：“Check the answers．”校对完答案，教师继续提问：“What should you do now?”引导学生回答：“Learn Let's talk．”
(2)教师说：“I am going to plant a flower on the weekend．But I don’t know how do that．Can you tell me? Who knows?”教师提示学生可以适当用中文解释。如果有学生举手，教师就问：“OK．How d0 you do that?”引导学生回答。“First，
put the seeds in the soil．”然后，教师接着说：“What should I do then? 引导学生回答“Water it．
(3)教师说：
“Zhang Peng is talking to his teacher．Now let's see what they talking about．”学生翻开学生用书，教师放录音，学生跟读。教师解释In several days的意思是几天以后。”教师板书四会句型：How do you do that? What should you do then?学生仿写。
(4)同桌学生进行对话替换操练，可以谈论西瓜(watermelon)、小麦(wheat)等植物的种植过程。然后选几组在班上表演对话。
(5)教师指导学生运用主句型编对话。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)做本单元B Let's talk部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)抄写四会句子。 。
(3)慢慢消失的句子
教师把B Let's talk部分的主要句型写在黑板上。学生闭上眼睛，教师擦掉其 中的一个词，学生睁开眼睛，说出擦掉的单词并把句子补充完整。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(4)请学生参照图示在校园或家里种一棵树，并把种植的过程用英语讲述给家长
和朋友听。
教学反思：
第六课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．通过阅读植物日记进一步熟悉掌握植物生长过程的叙述。
2．能够独立完成Let's check部分的听力练习。
3．能够理解、认读B Let's read部分的句子。
二．教学重、难点分析
本课时需要重点掌握植物生长日记的生长过程的叙述。要求教师引导学生通过阅 读理解、操练逐步自如运用。
51
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
三、课前准备
1．教师准备若干份海报和打乱顺序的课文里的句子。(www.61k.com]
2．教师准备录音机和相关录音带。
四、教学步骤和建议
1．热身(Warm-up)
日常口语练习。
2．预习(Preview)
教师放第68页上的歌谣录音，学生跟录音说唱。然后教师带领学生按照下面的歌词说唱： First the seed，
Then the soil．
Next the sprout，
The plant is tall．
3．新课呈现(Presentation)
Let's read
(1)快听快指
教师出示四盆植物的图片，依次编号。教师说一个句子，学生迅速找到对应的图片并报出号码。
(2)加句子游戏
学生五人一组，每人依次说一句话，比如第一名学生说：
“I put some soil in the pot．”第二名学生在此基础上再加一句话，比如：
“I put some soil in the pot. I put a small seed in the soil．”依此类推。
(3)教师说：“Liu Yun plants some flower seeds．She writes a diary．Let's read diary．”学生打开学生用书阅读四篇日记。学生分小组讨论日记内容。教师答疑。本部分的两个难点为：1 water it and make sure it gets lots of sun. I can hardly wait!对于这两个句子，教师不必做过多解释，学生理解意思即可
(4)教师放本部分的录音，学生听完后回答问题。
(5)我说你画
请一名擅长绘画的学生到黑板前示范，其他学生读任意一篇日记，每人谈一句。请站在黑板前的学生画出正确的配图。继续请三名学生依次到前面，其他学生读日记，把另外三幅插图的内容画在黑板上。然后反过来，教师任意指定一幅画，请学生说句子描述图画。 Let's check
教师放录音，学生完成练习。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)做本单元B Let's read部分的活动手册配套练习。
(2)植物日记
教师把全班分成四大组，分给每组一张大海报和16个打乱顺序的句子，16个句子都摘自Let's read部分的日记。在规定的时间内，请他们合作给句子排序并贴在海报上，配以漂亮的插图后张贴在教室里。
(3)自然小博士
教师出示有关植物生长过程的句子，请学生阅读后判断正误。
(4)寻物启事
学生五人一组。教师发给每组一张植物照片，各组写一段文字对照片上的植物进行描述。要求每人写一句话。然后教师把各组写的短文收上来，任意抽取一篇读出来，学生根据描述在所有的照片中找出相应的照片。注意：负责描述这张照片小组的学生不能猜。教师发给学
52
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
生一些植物的种子，鼓励学生回家种在花盆里并写出生长日记。［www.61k.com］
教学反思：
Recycle 2 教案
第一课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．复习第四单元有关笔友的情况描述。
2．能够读懂Read and answer的小短文，并能完成相应的练习。
3．总结复习4o个音标的认读。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时的重点是将第四单元的中心语言融为一体，在具体情景中自然运用，难点是阅读理解篇幅较长的短文。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备一套音标卡片。
2．教师给每位学生准备一段不完整的短文。
3．录制几段学生自我介绍的录音。
四．教学步骤
1. 热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放第四单元“My Pen Pal”的歌曲录音，学生跟唱。
(2)单词大比拼
全班分成若干小组，在规定的时间内，小组成员合作写出他们知道的所有职业名称。
2．预习(Preview)
日常会话。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)教师放一名学生自我介绍的录音，让学生猜一猜这是谁的自我介绍。
(2)小调查
教师给每位学生准备一段不完整的短文，请学生调查一名同学，同时把相关信息填人短文。以下内容供参考：
My friend is a _______.______father is a ______.________mother is a ________. They live next to a _______.My friend’s favourite food is ________.______ is ______favourite colour.
调查结束后，教师任意读一篇完成的短文，请学生猜一猜他是谁。
Read and answer
(1)教师说：
“Zhang Peng has a pen pal．what does he know about 11is pen pal? Let’s
read．”学生阅读第一段，找出不理解的地方，同桌之间讨论，然后教师答疑。教师问：“What do you know about his pen pal?'’教师说：
“Zhang Peng knows a lot about his pen pal，
but what is his pen pal's name? Is it a boy or a girl? Let’s go on reading．学生读第二段，教师请学生回答刚刚提出的问题。
(2)教师提供若干与课文内容相关的句子，再放一遍录音，请学生边听边判出句子正误。
(3)让学生在规定的时间内再次通读短文，完成回答问题的练习，同桌之间互批。
53
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
Let's play
(1)教师出示4o个音标卡片，学生开小火车朗读，教师把卡片奖励给读得交给学生。（www.61k.com)
(2)快速反应
教师说一个音标，持有该音标卡片的学生迅速起立，出示卡片并读出音标．如果读错了，就要把卡片转交给没有卡片的同学，然后退出比赛。
(3)学生翻开学生用书，教师带领学生指指读读。然后教师读音标，学生报出相应的号码。
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
(4)教师带领学生拼读一个单词，比如：actor，指导学生找到与之相对应的音标并连线。学生完成其它七个单词和音标的连线。
4． 巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)小作家
教师提供若干词语和一个题目，让学生根据所给题目将词语组织成文。如给出词语：dog，father，blue，bike，girl；题目是：My Pen Pal。学生分小组完成短文。
(2)做本单元的活动手册配套练习。
(3)让学生给自己的同学、朋友或老师写一封信，介绍自己的爱好及家人的情况但不署名，看看对方能否猜出写信人的姓名。
教学反思：
第二课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．通过阅读Let's read部分的短文复习植物种植过程和相关知识。
2．能够说唱歌谣，并能理解其含义。
二、教学重、难点分析
本课时的重、难点为复习并使用有关种植的句子并完成Ways to help your plant grow的书写。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备字母头饰。
2．教师准备录音机及录音带。
3．教师准备Let's chant部分的插图。
4．教师准备本课时的单词卡片。
四、教学步骤
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放歌曲“Little Corn'’的录音，学生跟唱。
(2)教师出示各种植物照片，进行日常会话练习。
2．预习(Preview)
排队
教师提供一个四会单词的字母头饰，如：s-e-e-d，请几名学生上来围成一圈闭上眼睛，教师把头饰分别戴在他们的头上。教师发口令：“Open your eyes．”学生张开眼睛，根据别人头上的字母来判断自己头上的字母，以最快的速度站成一排，说出单词。
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
Read and number
学生根据图的提示，分小组给对应的文字排序。
54
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
Let's read
(1)教师问：“How do you plant a flower?引导学生回答。［www.61k.com］教师继续问：
“What do flowers need?'’引导学生回答：“Water and sunlight．教师把学生提出的相关词语卡片贴在黑板上。
(2)看图(词)造句 o
让学生试着把黑板上的词语连起来说一说种花的过程。
(3)教师问：“How often do you water your flower? Once a day?Twice a day引导学生回答。教师向学生展示本部分的挂图，说：“Mike，
Chen Jie and Sarah each plant a flower．Guess which is Mike／Sarah／
Chen Jie's flower．学生分小组阅读短文。让学生猜一猜三盆花的主人是谁。
(4)教师出示三盆花的插图，教师心中想好一盆花，学生提问，根据教师的回答。猜一猜教师想的是哪一盆花。如，学生问：Is it strong／thin／short／tall?
(5)教师放课文录音，学生跟读。
Let's chant
教师出示Let's chant部分的挂图，放歌谣录音，学生说唱。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)学生完成活动手册的配套练习。
(2)学生回家种一盆花，通过观察和试验总结养花的方法。
教学反思：
第三课时
一、教学目标与要求
1．巩固家庭成员的名称、职业、爱好及生活习惯等表达方法。
2．能够独立完成Let's find out的内容。
3．学唱歌曲“Little Corn"。
二、教学重、难点分析
让学生学会捕捉听力材料里的关键信息是本课的教学重、难点，教师要注意培养 学生这方面的能力。
三、课前准备
1．教师准备本课时所用的单词卡片。
2．教师准备录音机及录音带。
3．学生收集一些名人照片。
四、教学步骤
1．热身(Warm-up)
(1)教师放第五单元的歌曲“My Family'’的录音，学生跟唱。
(2)日常口语练习。
2．预习(Preview)
看字母，说职业
教师出示职业名称单词的首字母，让学生说出整个单词。如：w-writer；d-driver／ doctor，a-accountant/actor/actress；T-TV reporter等o
3． 新课呈现(Presentation)
(1)从看字母说职业名称引出TV reporter，教师拿出一些名人照片说：
“Now you're a TV reporter．You're going to interview a famous person．You don't know who he／she is．But you know he／she is someone in the pictures．”给学
55
pep小学英语六年级上册 PEP小学英语六年级上册全册教案
生五次提问的机会，让他们根据教师的回答找出正确的人物。［www.61k.com）
(2)心有灵犀
请两名学生(sl和s2)上来，每人拿着纸和笔分别站在教室的两边。教师提问：
“What does s1’s father do?”站在台上的两名学生分别把答案写在各自的纸上。如果两人的答案完全相同，两人就算获胜。教师继续问问题“What does ?’s?do?”全体学生一起写出答案，谁写的答案正确就可以得一分。
Listen and match
(1)教师说：“Do you want to know more about Liu Yun?'’学生回答后教师
说： “Please listen and find out．'’教师放本部分录音，学生认真听。
(2)教师再放一遍录音，学生完成表格。分小组核对答案并就Liu Yun's family进行问答。 Let's sing
教师放歌曲“Little Corn'’的录音或VCD，学生跟唱。
4．巩固和延伸(Consolidation and extension)
(1)家庭照片
5-6个学生为一组，每名学生饰演一个家庭成员角色，依次表演并介绍自己职业、爱好、生活习惯等内容。
(2)排队成句
教学反思：
56
扩展：新pep六年级上册教案 / pep六年级上册教案 / 新pep六年级下册教案
三 : 人教版(pep)小学六年级上册英语知识竞赛考试试题
★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★
柳林小学2012—2013六年级英语知识竞赛试题
成绩：
一、看一看，连一连。［www.61k.com）(5分)
shoe store take a trip read a magazine get off post card
A. at B. and C. for
( ) 8. ______ Sunday, I’m going to the zoo ______ subway.
A. On, on B. On. by C. In, at ( ) 9. Her father is ______TV this afternoon.
A. watching B. going to watch C. go to watch ( ) 10. ______can I get to pet shop?
A. How B. What C. Where ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★
密二、选出划线部分读音与给出的音标不
同的一个。（10分）
（ ）1. / i: / A. tree B. beat C .tea D red
（ ）2. / i / A. pig B. bike C. dish D. pink （ ）3. / e / A. get B. me C. bed D. seven
（ ）4. / ae / A. plane B. cat C. fan D. apple.
（ ）5. / a: / A. fat B. car C. card D. far 三、小马虎的作业总是丢三落四，请你帮他选择一下吧！（20分）
( ) 1.—Where is the cinema? —It’s next______ the hospital.
封 A .on B .to C. in
( ) 2. Turn right ______ the bookstore.
A. on B. to C. at
( ) 3.—Where is the post office?—It’s west ______ the shoe store.
A. of B. at C. to
( )4. What are you going to do on the weekend?
A. I’m going by train. B. It’s next to the shoe store.
C. I’m going to read a magazine. 线( ) 5. ______ are you going? This evening.
A. Where B. When C. What ( ) 6. It’s not far ______ here. ★★★★★★★
★★★★★★★
A. to B. at C. from
★★★★★★★
( ) 7. Walk straight ______ three minutes. ★★★★★★★
★★★★★★★ ★★★★★★★
四、从B栏中选出适合A栏的答语：（5分）
( ) 1. When are you going？ a. He is a teacher. ( ) 2. How can we go there? b. It is green.
( ) 3. What does he do？ c. I’m going at 5 o’clock. ( ) 4. What color is it？ d. I am watching TV. ( ) 5. What are you doing？ e. You can walk. 五、阅读加油站。（20分）
（一）根据短文内容，选择恰当的答案。
Tomorrow is Saturday. Ben isn't going to school. He is going to get up early. In the morning, he is going to Xinhua Library .He's going there by bus. He's going to have lunch in KFC In the afternoon, he is going to play ping-pong with his friends. At about 4:30,he is going home to do homework. Then he is going to water the flowers .He's going to cook the meals for his parents in the evening.
( ) 1. What day is it today? Today is A. Friday. B. Saturday.
( ) 2. What’s Ben going to do on Saturday morning ?
A. Xinhua Library B. visit his grandparents
( ?
A. In KFC . B. In McDonald's
( ) 4. Ben is going to Xinhua Library by A. train. B. bus
( ) 5. Is Ben a good boy?
A Yes, he is. B. No, he isn't.
（二） 阅读下面的短文，判断下列句子的对错。
pep小学英语六年级上册期末试卷 人教版(pep)小学六年级上册英语知识竞赛考试试题
Today is Friday. I’m going to take a trip tomorrow. Now I’m going to the supermarket. I’m going to buy some food and a comic book. First , I ’m going to Guangzhou tomorrow morning. I’m going to go by train. I’m going to read my new comic book on the train. Then I’m going to Kunming by plane from Guangzhou. In Kunming , I’m going to see folk dances and eat snack. I’ll be very happy.
( ) 1. I’m going to take a trip next Friday.
( ) 2 I’m going to buy some food and a comic book tomorrow. ( )3. I’m going to Guangzhou by train this morning. ( )4. I’m going to Kunming by plane.
( ) 5. I’m going to see modern dances in Kunming.
B: It's north of the post office.
B: Yes ，it is .
B: You can go by the No.14 bus. Get off at the science museum, and then
A: I'm going to buy a story book. B: You're welcome.
七、根据所给答句写出问句。（www.61k.com］（10分)
1. ？ I usually go to school on foot.
2. ? You can go to the post office by the No. 30 bus. 3. ?
I am going to visit my grandparents tomorrow morning. 4. ?
I am going to Shanghai tomorrow.
5._________________________________________ ? The bookstore is south of the supermarket 八、智力测试(共10分) 按要求完成下列各题.
（ ）1.It’s raining cats and dogs
A.下猫狗 B.倾盆大雨 C.毛毛雨 D.不下雨
( )2. Lily is Mr. Black's girl Friday. She gives him a lot of help. What's the meaning of “girl Friday”?
A.女仆人 B.得力的女助手 C.女儿 D.女上司 ( )3.Which month has 28 days?
A.Feburary B.Narch C.June D.Every month
（ ）4.How many clours are there in the rainbow? A.Three B.Five C.Seven D.Nine ( )5.I don’t like Mr. Chen.He is an old woman A.老太婆 B.喜欢啰嗦的人 C. 没妻子的老头 D.女人气的男人 九、看图作文。根据所给的图片用“be going to’’句型 写5句话。（10分） ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________
本文标题：pep小学英语六年级上册教案-PEP三年级-六年级教学内容61阅读| 精彩专题| 最新文章| 热门文章| 苏ICP备13036349号-1